CA2588881A1 - Potentiators of glutamate receptors - Google Patents

Potentiators of glutamate receptors Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CA2588881A1
CA2588881A1 CA002588881A CA2588881A CA2588881A1 CA 2588881 A1 CA2588881 A1 CA 2588881A1 CA 002588881 A CA002588881 A CA 002588881A CA 2588881 A CA2588881 A CA 2588881A CA 2588881 A1 CA2588881 A1 CA 2588881A1
Authority
CA
Canada
Prior art keywords
mmol
substituted
hydroxy
compound
formula
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Granted
Application number
CA002588881A
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
CA2588881C (en
Inventor
Thomas Daniel Aicher
Dana Rae Benesh
Maria-Jesus Blanco-Pillado
Guillermo S. Cortez
Todd Michael Groendyke
Albert Khilevich
James Allen Knobelsdorf
Fredrik Pehr Marmsater
Jeffrey Michael Schkeryantz
Tony Pisal Tang
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Eli Lilly and Co
Original Assignee
Individual
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Individual filed Critical Individual
Publication of CA2588881A1 publication Critical patent/CA2588881A1/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of CA2588881C publication Critical patent/CA2588881C/en
Expired - Fee Related legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C229/00—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C229/52—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having amino and carboxyl groups bound to carbon atoms of six-membered aromatic rings of the same carbon skeleton
    • C07C229/54—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having amino and carboxyl groups bound to carbon atoms of six-membered aromatic rings of the same carbon skeleton with amino and carboxyl groups bound to carbon atoms of the same non-condensed six-membered aromatic ring
    • C07C229/60—Compounds containing amino and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton having amino and carboxyl groups bound to carbon atoms of six-membered aromatic rings of the same carbon skeleton with amino and carboxyl groups bound to carbon atoms of the same non-condensed six-membered aromatic ring with amino and carboxyl groups bound in meta- or para- positions
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61K—PREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00—Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33—Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/435—Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having six-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • A61K31/44—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof
    • A61K31/4427—Non condensed pyridines; Hydrogenated derivatives thereof containing further heterocyclic ring systems
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/08—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for nausea, cinetosis or vertigo; Antiemetics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/02—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for peripheral neuropathies
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/04—Centrally acting analgesics, e.g. opioids
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/06—Antimigraine agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/08—Antiepileptics; Anticonvulsants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/14—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abnormal movements, e.g. chorea, dyskinesia
    • A61P25/16—Anti-Parkinson drugs
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/18—Antipsychotics, i.e. neuroleptics; Drugs for mania or schizophrenia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/20—Hypnotics; Sedatives
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/22—Anxiolytics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/24—Antidepressants
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/30—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating abuse or dependence
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/16—Otologicals
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/08—Antiallergic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07C—ACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C317/00—Sulfones; Sulfoxides
    • C07C317/44—Sulfones; Sulfoxides having sulfone or sulfoxide groups and carboxyl groups bound to the same carbon skeleton
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/60—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/61—Halogen atoms or nitro radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/60—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/62—Oxygen or sulfur atoms
    • C07D213/63—One oxygen atom
    • C07D213/64—One oxygen atom attached in position 2 or 6
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/60—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/62—Oxygen or sulfur atoms
    • C07D213/63—One oxygen atom
    • C07D213/65—One oxygen atom attached in position 3 or 5
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/60—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/62—Oxygen or sulfur atoms
    • C07D213/70—Sulfur atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/60—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/78—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms, with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals
    • C07D213/79—Acids; Esters
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/60—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/78—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms, with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals
    • C07D213/79—Acids; Esters
    • C07D213/80—Acids; Esters in position 3
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/60—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/78—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms, with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals
    • C07D213/84—Nitriles
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/60—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/78—Carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms, with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals
    • C07D213/84—Nitriles
    • C07D213/85—Nitriles in position 3
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D257/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing rings having four nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms
    • C07D257/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing rings having four nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms not condensed with other rings
    • C07D257/04—Five-membered rings
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings directly linked by a ring-member-to-ring-member bond
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a chain containing hetero atoms as chain links

Landscapes

  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Psychology (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Otolaryngology (AREA)
  • Anesthesiology (AREA)
  • Addiction (AREA)
  • Ophthalmology & Optometry (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)
  • Organic Low-Molecular-Weight Compounds And Preparation Thereof (AREA)
  • Acyclic And Carbocyclic Compounds In Medicinal Compositions (AREA)
  • Pyridine Compounds (AREA)
  • Saccharide Compounds (AREA)
  • Thiazole And Isothizaole Compounds (AREA)
  • Plural Heterocyclic Compounds (AREA)
  • Heterocyclic Carbon Compounds Containing A Hetero Ring Having Nitrogen And Oxygen As The Only Ring Hetero Atoms (AREA)
  • Steroid Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention provides compounds of formula (I); pharmaceutical compositions thereof, and methods of using the same, processes or preparing the same, and intermediates thereof.

Description

POTENTIATORS OF GLUTAMATE RECEPTORS
This application claims the benefit of U. S. provisional application Ser. No.
60/630,060 filed Nov. 22, 2004.
The present invention provides a compound of formula I, pharmaceutical compositions thereof, and methods of using the same, as well as processes for preparing the same, and intermediates thereof.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
The excitatory amino acid L-glutamate (at times referred to herein simply as glutamate) through its many receptors mediates most of the excitatory neurotransmission within the mammalian central nervous system (CNS) and has been implicated in numerous peripheral nervous system (PNS) pathways. The excitatory amino acids, including glutamate, are of great physiological importance, playing a role in a variety of neurological, physiological and psychiatric processes, such as synaptic plasticity, motor control, respiration, cardiovascular regulation, sensory perception, and emotional responses.
Glutamate acts via at least two distinct classes of receptors. One class is composed of the ionotropic glutamate (iGlu) receptors that act as ligand-gated ion channels. Via activation of the iGlu receptors, glutamate is thought to regulate fast neuronal transmission within the synapse of two connecting neurons in the CNS.
The second general type of receptor is the G-protein or second messenger-linked "metabotropic" glutamate (mGlu) receptor. Both types of receptors appear not only to mediate normal synaptic transmission along excitatory pathways, but also participate in the modification of synaptic connections during development and throughout life.
Schoepp, Bockaert, and Sladeczek, Trends in Pharmacol. Sci., 11, 508 (1990);
McDonald and Johnson, Brain Research Reviews, 15, 41 (1990).
The mGlu receptors belong to the Class C G-protein coupled receptor (GPCR) family. This family of GPCR's, including the calcium-sensing receptors, GABAB
receptors and sensory receptors, are unique in that effectors bind to the amino-terminus portion of the receptor protein translating a signal via the transmembrane segments to the intracellular matrix through receptor/G-protein interactions. Ozawa, Kamiya and Tsuzuski, Prog. Neurobio., 54, 581 (1998). It has been demonstrated that the receptors are localized either pre- and/or post-synapticly where they can regulate neurotransmitter release, either glutamate or other neurotransmitters, or modulate the post-synaptic response of neurotransmitters, respectively.
At present, there are eight mGlu receptors that have been positively identified, cloned, and their sequences reported. These are further subdivided based on their amino acid sequence homology, their ability to effect certain signal transduction mechanisms, and their known pharmacological properties. Ozawa, Kamiya and Tsuzuski, Prog.
Neurobio., 54, 581 (1998). For instance, the Group I mGlu receptors, which include the mGlul and mGlu5, are known to activate phospholipase C (PLC) via Gaq-proteins thereby resulting in the increased hydrolysis of phosphoinositides and intracellular calcium mobilization. There are several compounds that are reported to activate the Group I mGlu receptors including DHPG, (+/-)-3,5-dihydroxyphenylglycine.
Schoepp, Goldworthy, Johnson, Salhoff and Baker, J. Neurochem., 63, 769 (1994); Ito, et al., Neurorep., 3, 1013 (1992). The Group II mGlu receptors consist of the two distinct receptors, mGlu2 and mGlu3 receptors. Both receptors are negatively coupled to adenylate cyclase via activation of Gai-protein. These receptors can be activated by a group-selective compound such as (1S,2S,5R,6S)-2-aminobicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-2,6-dicarboxylate. Monn, et al., J. Med. Chem., 40, 528 (1997); Schoepp, et al., Neuropharmacol., 36, 1 (1997). Similarly, the Group III mGlu receptors, including mGlu4, mGlu6, mGlu7 and mGlu8, are negatively coupled to adenylate cyclase via Gai and are potently activated by L-AP4 (L-(+)-2-amino-4-phosphonobutyric acid).
Schoepp, Neurochem. Int., 24, 439 (1994).
It should be noted that many of the available pharmacological tools are not ideal in that they cross react not only on the receptors within a group of mGlu receptors but also often have some activity between groups of mGlu receptors. For instance, compounds such as 1S,3R-ACPD, (1S,3R)-1-aminocyclopentane-trans-1,3-dicarboxylic acid, are believed to activate all of the Group I, II and III mGlu receptors depending upon the dose utilized while others, such as 1S,3S-ACPD, (1S,3S)-1-aminocyclopentane-trans-1 ,3-dicarboxylic acid, are more selective for the Group II receptors (mGlu2/3) than the Group I (mGlul/5) or Group III (mGlu4/6/7/8). Schoepp, Neurochem. Int., 24, 439 (1994). To date, there are very few examples of selective agents for the mGlu receptors.
Schoepp, Jane, and Monn, Neuropharmacol., 38, 1431 (1999).
It has become increasingly clear that there is a link between modulation of excitatory amino acid receptors, including the glutamatergic system, through changes in glutamate release or alteration in postsynaptic receptor activation, and a variety of neurological, psychiatric and neuroinflammatory disorders. e.g. Monaghan, Bridges and Cotman, Ann. Rev. Pharmacol. Toxicol., 29, 365-402 (1989); Schoepp and Sacann, Neurobio. Aging, 15, 261-263 (1994); Meldrum and Garthwaite, Tr. Pharmacol.
Sci., 11, 379-387 (1990). The medical consequences of such glutamate dysfunction make the abatement of these neurological processes an important therapeutic goal.
Leukotrienes are potent local mediators, playing a major role in inflammatory and allergic responses including arthritis, asthma, psoriasis, and thrombotic disease.
Leukotrienes are straight chain eicosanoids produced by the oxidation of arachidonic acid by lipoxygenases in several cell types including: eosinophils, neutrophils, mast cells, leukocytes, and macrophages. At the present time, there are two established Class A
GPCR receptors for the cysteinyl-leukotrienes (CysLT1 and CysLT2) which the leukotrienes LTC4, LTD4 and LTE4 activate, mediating their proinflammatory effects.
Each of the CysLT receptors has distinct tissue distributions and associations with physiological responses. Also, the leukotriene LTD4 has a higher affinity for the CysLT1 receptor than the other leukotrienes. Back, M. Life Sciences 71, 611-622, (2002). The leukotrienes, especially LTD4 and its receptor CysLT1, have been implicated in the pathogenesis of airway and allergic diseases such as asthma by contributing to bronchoconstriction, mucus secretion, and eosinophil migration. Thus, leulcotrienes have been shown to play an important role in the pathology of asthma. Rigorous proof for the role of leukotrienes in asthma has been provided by several pivotal clinical trials in which orally administered LTD4 receptor antagonists produce clear therapeutic benefit in asthma patients. These benefits include reduction in the use of classic asthma therapies such as corticosteroids. Kemp, J.P., Amer. J. Resp. Medi. 2, 139-156, (2003).
Numerous investigations confirm the importance of the leulcotrienes in allergic disorders as well. Thus, after allergen provocation, a marked increase in the LT
concentration in the nasal lavage fluid of patients with allergic rhinitis was detected both in the early phase and in the late phase. Creticos, P.S., S.P. Peters, N.F.
Adkinson, R.M.
Naclerio, E.C. Hayes, P.S. Norman, L.M. Lichtenstein, N. Eng. J. Med. 310:1626 (1984).
In addition, treatment with clinically efficacious antihistamines, such as azelastine, has shown a reduction in the formation of the cysteinyl-leukotrines, establishing a correlative relationship of allergic reaction symptoms to the degree of leukotriene formation and, thus, CysLT receptor activation. Achterrath-Tuckermann, U., Th. Simmet, W.
Luck, I.
Szelenyi, B. A. Peskar, Agents and Actions 24:217, 1988; Shin, M. H., F. M.
Baroody, D. Proud, A. Kagey-Sobotka, L. M. Lichtenstein, M. Naclerio, Clin. Exp.
Allergy 22:289, 1992.
United States Patent No. 6,194,432 B 1 discloses a metliod for using leukotriene antagonist drugs to prevent and treat recurrent primary headaches including migraine headaches.
United States Patent No. 5,977,177 discloses certain substituted phenyl derivative compounds are modulators of endothelin and, as such, are useful in treating many different conditions including asthma.
United States Patent No. 4,853,398 discloses certain benzene derivative compounds are selective antagonists of leukotrienes and, as such, are useful in treating allergic disorders such as asthma.
European Patent Application No. EP 28063 Al and UK Patent Application No.
GB 2058785 disclose certain phenol derivative compounds are antagonists of slow reacting substance of anapliylaxis and, as such, are useful in treating asthina, hay fever and skin afflictions.
Brown, F. J. et al J. Med. Chem. 32, p. 807-826 (1989) discloses certain hydroxyacetophenone derivative compounds are antagonists of leukotrienes and, as such, play a role in treating asthma, International Patent Application Publication No.WO 2001056990 A2 and United States Patent No. 6,800,651 B2 disclose certain pyridine derivative compounds are potentiators of metabotropic glutamate receptor function, specifically;
potentiators of inGlu2 receptor function and, as such, are useful in the treatment of many different conditions including anxiety and migraine headache.
International Patent Application Publication No.WO 2004018386 and Pinkerton, A. B. et al Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 14, p.5329-5332 (2004) disclose certain acetophenone derivative compounds are potentiators of glutamate receptor function, specifically; potentiators of mGlu2 receptor function and, as such, are useful in the treatment of many different conditions including anxiety, schizophrenia and migraine headache.
Recently, Pinkerton, A. B. et al Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 14, p. 5867-5872 (2004) disclose certain 4-thiopyridyl acetophenone derivative compounds are potentiators of glutamate receptor function, specifically; potentiators of mGlu2 receptor function and, as such, may be useful in the treatment of CNS disorders including anxiety, schizophrenia and epilepsy.
The present invention provides compounds of formula I that are potentiators of the mGlu2 receptor and antagonists of the CysLTl receptor. As such, compounds of formula I would provide a means to treat disorders associated with glutamate or leukotrienes. In addition, it is anticipated that in disorders with a glutamate and leukotriene component to the onset, propagation and/or symptoms, the compounds of formula I will provide an effective treatment for the patient. The medical consequences of such glutamate dysfunction make the abatement of these neurological processes an important therapeutic goal.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention provides a compound of formula I:

O ~
HO I XlY,Ar' L, Ar I
wherein R' is selected from the group consisting of Cl-C5 alkyl, C3-C7 cycloalkyl, C4-cycloalkylalkyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C1-C5 alkyl, substituted C1-C5 alkyl, halo, phenyl, substituted phenyl, C1-C3 fluoroalkyl, CN, C02R3, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, thiazolyl, substituted thiazoyl, furanyl, substituted furanyl, pyridinyl, substituted pyridinyl, oxazolyl, substituted oxazloyl, isothiazolyl, substituted isothiazoyl, isoxazolyl, substituted isoxazolyl, 1,2,4-oxadiazolyl, substituted 1,2,4-oxadiazolyl, pyrimidinyl, substituted pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, and substituted pyridazinyl;
X is selected from the group consisting of 0, S(O),,,, and NR3;
Y is selected from the group consisting of C1-C3 alkanediyl and substituted C l -C3 alkanediyl;
Arl and Ar2 are independently selected from the group consisting of phenylene, substituted phenylene, thiophenediyl, substituted thiophenediyl, thiazolediyl, substituted thiazolediyl, furanediyl, substituted furanediyl, pyridinediyl, substituted pyridinediyl, oxazolediyl, substituted oxazolediyl, isothiazolediyl, substituted isothiazolediyl, isoxazolediy.l, substituted isoxazolediyl, pyrimidinediyl, substituted pyrimidinediyl, pyridazinediyl, substituted pyridazinediyl and 1,2,4-oxadiazole-3,5-diyl;
L is selected from the group consisting of -G-0-J-, -G-S(O)p-J-, and -G-N(R4)-J-;
G and J are independently selected from the group consisting of a bond and C 1-C3 alkanediyl;
R3 is independently hydrogen or Cl-C5 alkyl;
R4 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C1-C5 alkyl, C(=O)R3, C(=O)NR3R3 and S02R3;
Z is selected from the group consisting of (CHZ)õCOOH, O
N,N N 0 -H
J--(CH2)q--~\ -NH s \ y NS N O
N HO NR N~ ~
H \O N-O
O
s H
O XR ' N, O 11 N and N ~
HO O N-0 7: N/ N N

H

m and p are independently 0, 1, or 2;
n and q are independently 0, 1, 2 or 3; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
The present invention also provides for novel pharmaceutical compositions, comprising a compound of the formula I and a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent.
Because the compounds of formula I are potentiators of the mGlu2 receptor, the compounds of formula I are useful for the treatment of a variety of neurological and psychiatric disorders associated with glutamate dysfunction, including: acute neurological and psychiatric disorders such as cerebral deficits subsequent to cardiac bypass surgery and grafting, stroke, cerebral ischemia, spinal cord trauma, head trauma, perinatal hypoxia, cardiac arrest, hypoglycemic neuronal damage, dementia (including AIDS-induced dementia), Alzheimer's disease, Huntington's Chorea, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, multiple sclerosis, ocular damage, retinopathy, cognitive disorders, idiopathic and drug-induced Parkinson's disease, muscular spasms and disorders associated with muscular spasticity including tremors, epilepsy, convulsions, migraine (including migraine headache), urinary incontinence, substance tolerance, substance withdrawal (including, substances such as opiates, nicotine, tobacco products, alcohol, benzodiazepines, cocaine, sedatives, hypnotics, etc.), psychosis, schizophrenia, anxiety (including generalized anxiety disorder, panic disorder, and obsessive compulsive disorder), mood disorders (including depression, mania, bipolar disorders), trigeminal neuralgia, hearing loss, tinnitus, macular degeneration of the eye, emesis, brain edema, pain (including acute and chronic pain states, severe pain, intractable pain, neuropathic pain, and post-traumatic pain), tardive dyskinesia, sleep disorders (including narcolepsy), attention deficit/hyperactivity disorder, and conduct disorder.
In another embodiment the present invention provides methods of treating neurological and psychiatric disorders associated with glutamate dysfunction, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of formula I. That is, the present invention provides for the use of a compound of formula I or pharmaceutical composition thereof for the treatment neurological and psychiatric disorders associated with glutamate dysfunction.
Of the disorders above, the treatinent of migraine, anxiety, schizopllrenia, and epilepsy are of particular importance.
In a preferred embodiment the present invention provides a method of treating migraine, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of formula I.
In another preferred embodiment the present invention provides a method of treating anxiety, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of formula I. Particularly preferred anxiety disorders are generalized anxiety disorder, panic disorder, and obsessive compulsive disorder.

-~-In another preferred embodiment the present invention provides a method of treating schizophrenia, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of formula I.
In yet another preferred embodiment the present invention provides the use of a coinpound of formula I for the manufacture of a medicainent for the treatment of neurological and psychiatric disorders associated with glutamate dysfunction.
In yet another preferred embodiment the present invention provides a compound of formula I for use as a medicament.
In yet another preferred embodiment the present invention provides the use of a compound of formula I for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of migraine.
In yet another preferred einbodiment the present invention provides a pharmaceutical composition for the treatment of neurological and psychiatric disorders associated with glutamate dysfunction containing as an active ingredient a compound of formula I.
In yet another preferred embodiment the present invention provides a method of treating epilepsy, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of formula I.
Because such potentiators, including the compounds of formula I, positively modulate metabotropic glutamate receptor response to glutamate, it is an advantage that the present methods utilize endogenous glutamate.
Because such potentiators positively modulate metabotropic glutamate receptor response to glutamate agonists it is understood that the present invention extends to the treatment of neurological and psychiatric disorders associated with glutamate dysfunction by administering an effective amount of a metabotropic glutamate potentiator, including the compounds of formula I, in combination with a potentiated amount of a metabotropic glutamate receptor agonist. Such a combination may be advantageous in that it may augment the activity and selectivity of an agonist of metabotropic glutamate receptors, in particular a potentiator of mGlu2 receptors.
Because many the compounds of formula I are antagonists of the CysLT1 receptor, many of the compounds of formula I are useful for the treatment of a variety of disorders mediated by one or more leukotrienes such as inflammatory and allergic disorders associated with leukotriene mediation including inflammatory bowel syndrome, inflammatory bowel disease, arthritis, asthma, psoriasis, and thrombotic disease.
In another embodiment the present invention provides methods of treating a variety of disorders mediated by one or more leukotrienes, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of formula I. That is, the present invention provides for the use of a coinpound of formula I or pharmaceutical composition thereof for the treatment inflarnmatory and allergic disorders associated with leukotriene mediation.
In a preferred embodiment the present invention provides a method of treating asthina, comprising administering to a patient in need tliereof an effective amount of a compound of formula I.
In another embodiment the present invention provides a process for preparing a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
This invention provides methods of potentiating metabotropic glutamate receptors, in particular mGlu2 receptors. In the present methods an effective amount of a potentiator of metabotropic glutamate 2 receptors, including a compound of formula I, is administered which positively modulates the effect of glutamate or glutamate agonists on the subject receptor.
Before describing the present invention in greater detail, it is understood that the invention in its broadest sense is not limited to particular embodiments described herein, as variations of the particular embodiments described herein are within the scope of the claimed invention.
Thus, coinpounds useful in the present invention are those which are potentiators of metabotropic glutamate receptors, particularly, those that potentiate the effects of glutamate and glutamate agonists at mGlu2 metabotropic glutamate receptors, and even more particularly, those that potentiate the effects of glutamate and glutamate agonists at mGlu2 receptors. Useful compounds are varied in structure, and so long as they embrace the above properties, they are suitable for use in the present invention.
Preferred compounds include, but are not limited to, those described herein.
The compounds of formula I potentiate the function of glutamate receptors.
Specifically, the compounds of formula I are potentiators of the mGlu2 receptor.

Compounds of in the present invention also include those which are modulators of leukotriene receptors, particularly, those that antagonize the CysLT1 receptor.
As used herein, the following terms have the meanings indicated:
The term "C1-C5 alkyl" refers to a straight or branched alkyl chain having from one to five carbon atoms, and includes methyl, ethyl, propyl, iso-propyl, butyl, iso-butyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl, pentyl and the like. Particular values of "C1-C5 alkyl"
are methyl, etliyl, n-propyl and iso-propyl.
The term "alkyl" refers to a monovalent aliphatic hydrocarbon. Within the meaning of "alkyl" is the tenn "C1-C3 alkyl".
The term "C 1-C3 alkyl" refers to a straight or branched alkyl chain having from one to tliree carbon atoms, and includes methyl, ethyl, propyl, iso-propyl, and the like.
The term "substituted C 1-C5 alkyl" refers to a straight or branched alkyl chain having from one to five carbon atoms, and includes methyl, ethyl, propyl, iso-propyl, butyl, iso-butyl, sec-butyl, t-butyl and pentyl having from 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, halogen, azido, alkoxy, acyloxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, amido, substituted amido, amino, acylamino, sulfonylamido, sulfonamide, phenyl, substituted phenyl, phenoxy, substituted phenoxy, benzyloxy, substituted benzyloxy, pyridyl, substituted pyridyl, thienyl, and substituted thienyl.
The term "C1-C5 alkanediyl" refers to a straight or branched divalent alkyl chain having from one to five carbon atoms, and includes methylene and ethane-1,1-diyl.
The term "substituted Cl-C5 alkanediyl" refers to a straiglit or branched divalent alkyl chain having from one to five carbon atoms, and includes methylene having a substituent selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, fluoro, azido, methoxy, amino, acetylamino and methylsulfonamide. Particular values of "substituted C1-alkanediyl" are CH(OH), CH(F), CHN3, CH(OCH3), CHNHZ, CHNH(C=O)CH3, CHNH(S02)CH3.
The term "C1-C3 alkanediyl" refers to a straight or branched divalent alkyl chain having from one to three carbon atoms, and includes methylene.
The term "substituted C1-C3 alkanediyl" refers to a straight or branched alkyl chain having from one to three carbon atoms, and includes methylene, having from 1 or 2 substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, halogen, azido, alkoxy, acyloxy, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, amido, substituted amido, amino, acylamino, sulfonylamido, sulfonamide, phenyl, substituted phenyl, pyridyl, substituted pyridyl, thienyl, and substituted thienyl The term "halogen or halo" refers to chloro, fluoro, bromo or iodo.
The term "C1-C3 fluoro alkyl" refers to an alkyl chain having from one to three carbon atoms substituted with one or more fluorine atoms, and includes fluoromethyl, difluorometliyl, trifluoromethyl, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl, 3,3,3-trifluoropropyl and the like. A
particular value of "C1-C3 fluoro alkyl" is trifluoromethyl.
The term "alkoxy" refers to a straight or branched alkyl chain attached to an oxygen atom. Within the meaning of "alkoxy" is the term "C1-C4 alkoxy".
The term "C1-C4 alkoxy" refers to straight or branched alkyl chain having from one to four carbon atoms attached to an oxygen atom, and includes methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, iso-propoxy, butoxy, iso-butoxy, sec-butoxy, t-butoxy, and the like.
The term "substituted alkoxy" refers to a straight or branched alkyl chain attached to an oxygen atom having from 1 to 3 substituents. Within the meaning of "substitiuted alkoxy" is the terin "substituted C1-C4 alkoxy".
The tenn "substituted C 1-C4 alkoxy" refers to straight or branched alkyl chain having from one to four carbon atoms attached to an oxygen atom, and includes methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, iso-propoxy, butoxy, iso-butoxy, sec-butoxy, t-butoxy, and the like, having from 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, halogen, alkoxy, carboxy, amido, substituted ainido, ainino, acylamino, sulfonylamido, sulfonamide, phenyl, and substituted phenyl; and when one or more of the substituents is hydroxy, halogen, alkoxy, amino, acylamino, and sulfonamide, then those substituents are not attached to the same carbon as the alkoxy oxygen atom.
The term "C3-C7 cycloalkyl" refers to saturated cyclic alkyl group having from three to seven carbon atoms and includes cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, and cycloheptyl.
The term "C4-C8 cycloalkylallcyl" refers to saturated cyclic alkyl group having from three to seven carbon atoms linked to the point of substitution by a divalent unsubstituted saturated straight-chain or branched-chain hydrocarbon radical having at least 1 carbon atom and includes, cyclopropylmethyl, cyclopropyl-2-propyl, cyclobutylethyl, cyclopentylmethyl, cyclohexylmethyl, cycloheptylmethyl and the like.

The terms "phenyl and substituted phenyl" or "phenylene and substituted phenylene" refer to a monovalent or divalent radical, repectively, of the formula Ra wherein Ra is from 1 to 3 groups independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, substituted allcoxy, halogen, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, amido, substituted amido, amino, acylamino, sulfonylamido, sulfonamide, cyano, nitro, phenyl, and substituted phenyl.
Particular values of Ra are hydrogen, methoxy and fluoro. Particular values of Ra are hydrogen, methoxy, fluoro and trifluoromethyl.
The terms "thiophenyl and substituted thiophenyl" or "thiophenediyl and substituted thiophenediyl" refer to a monovalent or divalent radical, repectively, of the formula (Rb wherein Rb is 1 or 2 groups independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, allcoxy, substituted alkoxy, halogen, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, amido, substituted amido, amino, acylamino, sulfonylamido, sulfonamide, cyano, nitro, phenyl, and substituted phenyl. A particular value of Rb is hydrogen.
The terms "pyridinyl and substituted pyridinyl" or "pyridinediyl and substituted pyridinediyl" refer to a monovalent or divalent radical, repectively, of the formula ('_RC
/
N

wherein R,, is from 1 to 3 groups independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, halogen, carboxy, allcoxycarbonyl, amido, substituted amido, amino, acylamino, sulfonylamido, sulfonamide, cyano, nitro, phenyl, and substituted phenyl. A
particular value of Rc is hydrogen.

The terms "thiazolyl and substituted thiazolyl" or "thiazolediyl and substituted thiazolediyl" refer to a monovalent or divalent radical, repectively, of the formula N R
//~ a ~s wherein Rd is 1 or 2 groups independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, halogen, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, amido, substituted amido, amino, acylamino, sulfonylatnido, sulfonamide, cyano, nitro, phenyl, and substituted phenyl. A particular value of Rd is hydrogen.
The terms "furanyl and substituted furanyl" or "furanediyl and substituted furanediyl" refer to a monovalent or divalent radical, repectively, of the formula a R.

o wherein Re is 1 or 2 groups independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, halogen, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, amido, substituted amido, amino, acylamino, sulfonylamido, sulfonamide, cyano, nitro, phenyl, and substituted phenyl. A particular value of R. is hydrogen.
The terms "isothiazolyl and substituted isothiazoyl" or "isothiazolediyl and substituted isothiazolediyl" refer to a monovalent or divalent radical, repectively, of the formula Rf N'20 S

wherein Rf is 1 or 2 groups independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, halogen, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, amido, substituted amido, amino, acylamino, sulfonylamido, sulfonamide, cyano, nitro, phenyl, and substituted phenyl. A particular value of Rf is hydrogen.

The terms "isoxazolyl and substituted isoxazolyl" or "isoxazolediyl and substituted isoxazolediyl" refer to a monovalent or divalent radical, repectively, of the formula ~Rg O

wherein R. is 1 or 2 groups independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, halogen, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, amido, substituted amido, amino, acylamino, sulfonylamido, sulfonamide, cyano, nitro, phenyl, and substituted phenyl. A particular value of Rg is hydrogen.
The terms "1,2,4-oxadiazolyl and substituted 1,2,4-oxadiazolyl" or "1,2,4-oxadiazole-3,5-diyl" refer to a monovalent radical or divalent radical lacking Rh, repectively, of the formula Rn N~ wherein Rh is independently selected from the group consisting of liydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, halogen, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, amido, substituted amido, amino, acylamino, sulfonylamido, sulfonainide, cyano, nitro, plienyl, and substituted phenyl. A particular value of Rh is hydrogen.
The terms "pyrimidinyl and substituted pyrimidinyl" or "pyrimidinediyl and substituted pyrimidinediyl" refer to a monovalent or divalent radical, repectively, of the formula N ~
II R, N

wherein R; is from 1 to 3 groups independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloallcyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, halogen, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, amido, substituted amido, amino, acylamino, sulfonylamido, sulfonamide, cyano, nitro, phenyl, and substituted phenyl. A
particular value of R; is hydrogen.
The terms "pyridazinyl and substituted pyridazinyl" or "pyridazinediyl and substituted pyridazinediyl" refer to a monovalent or divalent radical, repectively, of the formula I I Ri N a,,, N wherein Rj is from 1 to 3 groups independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxy, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, halogen, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, amido, substituted amido, amino, acylamino, sulfonylamido, sulfonamide, cyano, nitro, phenyl, and substituted phenyl. A
particular value of Rj is hydrogen.
The terms "oxazolyl and substituted oxazolyl" or "oxazolediyl and substituted oxazolediyl" refer to a monovalent or divalent radical, repectively, of the formula N
--Ri O

wherein Rl is 1 or 2 groups independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, halogen, carboxy, alkoxycarbonyl, ainido, substituted amido, amino, acylamino, sulfonylamido, sulfonamide, cyano, nitro, phenyl, and substituted phenyl. A particular value of RI is hydrogen.
The term "carboxy" refers to a radical of the formula O
AOH

The term "alkoxycarbonyl" refers to a radical of the formula O
AORk wherein Rk is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl. Particular values of Rk are methyl and ethyl.
The term "amido" refers to a radical of the formula O

The term "substituted amido" refers to a radical of the formula O
AN,Rm Rn wlierein R,,, is selected from the group consisting of alkyl and Rõ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl. A
particular value for R,,, is metliyl. Particular values for. Rn are hydrogen and methyl.
The term "acylamino" refers to a radical of the formula N'k Ro H
wherein Ro is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, phenyl, and substituted phenyl.
A particular value of Ro is methyl.
The term "sulfonylamido" refers to a radical of the formula ,S,NRp O R
p, wherein Rp is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, phenyl, and substituted phenyl;
and Rp, is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and alkyl. A
particular value for Rp is methyl. Particular values for Rp, are hydrogen and methyl.
The term "sulfonamide" refers to a radical of the formula ii H.O Rq wherein Rq is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, phenyl, and substituted phenyl.
A particular value of Rq is methyl.
As is readily apparent to those skilled in the art, the compounds of formula I
may exist as tautomers. Where tautomers exist, each tautomeric form and mixtures thereof, are contemplated as included in the present invention. When any reference in this application to one of the specific tautomers of the compounds of formula I is given, it is understood to encompass every tautomeric form and mixtures thereof. For example, where the group Z is tetrazolyl, a compound of formula I exists as tautomer I
and tautomer II. As such, it is understood any reference to a compound of formula I where the group Z is tetrazolyl as tautomer I encompasses tautomer II as well as mixtures of tautomer I and tautomer II.

0 N_N 0 N,NNH
.Y. =L. , ?N .Y. L. L-- N
HO R2 X Ari Ar2 H HO R2 X Ari Ar2 tautomer I tautomer II
It is understood that compounds of the present invention may exist as stereoisomers. All enantiomers, diastereomers, and mixtures thereof, are contemplated within the present invention. Where specific stereochemistries are identified in this application, the Cahn-Ingold-Prelog designations of (R)- and (S)- and the cis-and trans-designation of relative stereochemistry are used to refer to specific isomers and relative stereochemistry. Known optical rotations are designated by (+) and (-) for dextrorotatary and levorotatary, respectively. Where a chiral compound is resolved into its enantiomers, but absolute configurations are not determined, the isomers are designated as isomer 1, isomer 2, etc.
Specific stereoisomers can be prepared by stereospecific synthesis using enantiomerically pure or enriched starting materials. The specific stereoisomers of either starting materials or compounds of formula I can be resolved by techniques well known in the art, such as those found in Stereochemistry of Organic Compounds, E. I.
Eliel and S. H. Wilen (Wiley 1994) and Enantiomers, Racemates, and Resolutions, J.
Jacques, A.
Collet, and S. H. Wilen (Wiley 1991), including chromatography on chiral stationary phases, enzymatic resolutions, or fractional crystallization or chromatography of diastereomers formed for that purpose, such as diastereomeric salts.
While all enantiomers, diastereomers, and mixtures thereof, are contemplated within the present invention, preferred embodiments are single enantiomers and single diastereomers.
The terms "Arl and Ar2" refer to five or six member aryl or heterocyclic rings independently selected from the group consisting of phenylene, substituted phenylene, thiophenediyl, substituted thiophenediyl, thiazolediyl, substituted thiazolediyl, furanediyl, substituted furanediyl, pyridinediyl, substituted pyridinediyl, oxazolediyl, substituted oxazolediyl, isothiazolediyl, substituted isothiazolediyl, isoxazolediyl, substituted isoxazolediyl, pyrimidinediyl, substituted pyrimidinediyl, pyridazinediyl, substituted pyridazinediyl and 1,2,4-oxadiazole-3,5-diyl. It is understood that Arl and Ar2 being at least bi-radical may be attached in a 1-2, 1-3 or 1-4 regioisomeric position depending on the nature of the ring and the number and location of substituents. It is further understood that the present invention encompasses all possible regioisomeric combinations of attachment to Arl and Ar2. For example, where Arl is phenylene there exists three possible regioisomers, designated as 1-2 (ortho or o-), 1-3 (meta or m-) and 1-4 (para or p-), alt of which are encompassed in the present invention for a compound of formula I
where Arl is phenylene.

1 O z HO 2 I/ X~Y ~ HO XY ~ L'Ar2 .Ar Z 2 ~ 3 L

formula I formula I
1-4, paf a or p- 1-3, rneta or m-R
O L'Ar ~
i HX~Y

formula I
1-2, ortho or o-The term "pharmaceutically acceptable salt" refers to an addition salt that exists in conjunction with the acidic and/or basic portion of a compound of formula I.
Such salts include the pharmaceutically acceptable salts listed in Handbook of Pharmaceutical Salts:
Properties, Selection and Use, P. H. Stahl and C. G. Wermuth (Eds.), Wiley-VCH, New York, 2002 which are known to the skilled artisan. Pharmaceutically acceptable salts that are acid addition are formed when a compound of formula I and the intermediates described herein containing a basic functionality are reacted with a pharmaceutically acceptable acid. Pharmaceutically acceptable acids commonly employed to form such acid addition salts include inorganic acids, such as hydrochloric, hydrobromic, nitric, sulphuric or phoshoric acids, and organic acids such as acetic, citric, esylic, fumaric, glycolic, glucuronic, glutaric, lactic, maleic, malic, mandelic, mesylic, napadisylic, oxalic, succinic, tartaric, salicyclic, o-acetoxybenzoic, or p-toluene-sulphonic.
Pharmaceutically acceptable salts that are base addition are formed when a compound of formula I and the intermediates described herein containing a acidic functionality are reacted with a pharmaceutically acceptable base. Pharmaceutically acceptable bases commonly employed to form base addition salts include organic bases such as ammonia, arginine, benethamine, benzathine, benzylamine, betaine, butylamine, choline, dicyclohexylamine, diethanolamine, diethylamine, ethylenediamine, glucosamine, iinidazole, lysine, piperazine, procaine, and inorganic bases such as calcium, potassium, sodium and zinc salts of hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate and the like.
In addition to pharinaceiutically acceptable salts, other salts are included in the invention. They may serve as intermediates in the purification of compounds or in the preparation of other, for example pharmaceutically-acceptable, acid addition salts, or are useful for identification, characterization or purification.
The term "protecting group or Pg," as used herein, refers to those groups intended to protect or block functional groups against undesirable reactions during synthetic procedures. In the case of an amino or hydroxyl functional group, the suitable protecting group used will depend upon the conditions that will be employed in subsequent reaction steps wherein protection is required. For example, it may be desirable to employ the protection of multiple functional groups, such as amino and hydroxyl, and control their protection and deprotection independently. Commonly used amino and hydroxyl protecting groups are disclosed in Protective Groups In Organic Synthesis, T.W. Greene and P.G.M. Wuts 3rd Ed. (John Wiley & Sons, New York (1999)). Suitable amino protecting groups include acyl groups such as formyl, acetyl, propionyl, pivaloyl, t-butylacetyl, 2-chloroacetyl, 2-bromoacetyl, trifluoroacetyl, trichloroacetyl, phthalyl, o-nitrophenoxyacetyl, alpha-chlorobutyryl, benzoyl, 4-chlorobenzoyl, 4-bromobenzoyl, 4-nitrobenzoyl, and the like; sulfonyl groups such as benzenesulfonyl, p-toluenesulfonyl and the like, carbamate forming groups such as benzyloxycarbonyl, p-chlorobenzyloxycarbonyl, p-methoxybenzyloxycarbonyl, p-nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl, 2-nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl, p-bromobenzyloxycarbonyl, 3,4-dimethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl, 3,5-dimethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl, 2,4-dimethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl, 4-methoxybenzyloxycarbonyl, 2-nitro-4,5-dimethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl, 3,4,5-trimethoxybenzyloxycarbonyl, 1-(p-biphenylyl)-1-methylethoxycarbonyl, alpha, alpha-dimethyl-3,5-dimethoxy-benzyloxycarbonyl, benzhydryloxycarbonyl, t-butyloxycarbonyl, diisopropylmethoxycarbonyl, isopropyloxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, methoxycarbonyl, allyloxycarbonyl, 2,2,2-trichloroethoxycarbonyl, phenoxycarbonyl, 4-nitrophenoxycarbonyl, fluorenyl-9-methoxycarbonyl, cyclopentyloxycarbonyl, adamantyloxycarbonyl, cyclohexyloxycarbonyl, phenylthiocarbonyl and the like;
alkyl groups such as benzyl, triphenylmethyl, benzyloxymethyl and the like; and silyl groups such as trimethylsilyl and the like. Preferred suitable amino protecting groups are acetyl, methyloxycarbonyl, benzoyl, pivaloyl, allyloxycarbonyl, t-butylacetyl, benzyl, t-butyloxycarbonyl (Boc) and benzyloxycarbonyl (Cbz). Suitable hydroxyl protecting groups include ethers such as methoxymethyl, 1-ethoxyethyl, tert-butyl, allyl, benzyl, tetrahydropyranyl and the like; silyl ethers such as trimethylsilyl, triethylsilyl, triisopropylsilyl, tef=t-butyldimethylsilyl and the like; esters such as formate, acetate, pivaloate, benzoate and the like; and sulfonates such as mesylate, benzylsulfonate, tosylate and the like. Preferred suitable hydroxyl protecting groups are acetyl, trimethylsilyl, triisopropylsilyl, tert-butyldimethylsilyl and benzyl.
As with any group of pharmaceutically active compounds, some groups are preferred in their end use application. Preferred embodiments for a compound of formula I of the present invention are given below.
Compounds in which R' is C3-C7 cycloalkyl or C4-C8 cycloalkylalkyl are preferred. Compounds in which Rl is C1-C5 alkyl are more preferred. Compounds in which R' is metlZyl are even more preferred.
Compounds in which R2 is phenyl, substituted phenyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, thiazolyl, substituted thiazolyl, pyridinyl, or substituted pyridinyl are preferred. Compounds in which R2 is C1-C5 alkyl, halo or C1-C3 fluoroallcyl are more preferred. Compounds in which R2 is methyl, propyl, trifluoromethyl, or chloro are even more preferred.

Compounds in which X is S(O)m where m is 0, 1 or 2 are preferred. Compounds in which X is 0 are more preferred.
Compounds in which Y is C1-C3 alkanediyl are preferred. Compounds in which Y is methylene are more preferred.
Compounds in which Arl is substituted phenylene, 1,2,4-oxadiazol-3,5-diyl or substituted pyridinediyl are preferred. Compounds in which Arl is phenylene or pyridinediyl, either attached in the 1-3 position, are more preferred.
Compounds in which Arl is phenylene or pyridinediyl, eitlier ring attached in the 1-4 position, are even more preferred.
Compounds in which Ar2 is substituted phenylene or substituted pyridinediyl are preferred. Compounds in which Ar2 is phenylene or pyridinediyl are more preferred.
Compounds in which Ar2 is pyridinediyl attached in the 1-4 or 1-3 position are even more preferred.
Compounds in which Arl and Ar2 are independently phenylene or pyridinediyl are preferred.
Compounds in which Arl is phenylene are preferred.
Compounds in which Ar2 is pyridinediyl are preferred.
Compounds in which Ar2 is attached at the 1-4 position are preferred.
Compounds in which Ar2 is attached at the 1-3 position are preferred.
Compounds in which Arl is attached at the 1-3 position or 1-4 position are preferred.
Compounds in which L is S(O)p are preferred. Coinpounds in which L is S are more preferred. Compounds in which L is 0 are more preferred.
Compounds in which Z is O O

O R N O

, NS~O /N N ~N N~~(S or N ~
N-O \
N
HH H pH 2 NH2 are preferred. Compounds in which Z is N, J-(CH2),,COOH or -1-(CH2)n--<\
N_NH
are more preferred. Compounds in which Z is N.
~ COOH or N_NH
are even more preferred.
A compound of formula I as described above wherein R' is methyl or ethyl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, fluoro, chloro, trifluoromethyl, and COOH;
Xis0;
Y is methylene;
Arl is phenylene or pyridinediyl;
Ar2 is selected from the group consisting of phenylene, trifluoromethylphenylene, and pyridinediyl;
L is selected from the group consisting of 0, S, SO, SO2 and NH; and Z is COOH or N' N
\N-NH
is preferred.
A compound of formula I selected from the group consisting of 1-(2-hydroxy-3-methyl-4-{4-[4-(II-I-tetrazol-5-yl)-pyridin-2-yloxy]-benzyloxy}-phenyl)-ethanone, 1-(2-hydroxy-3-methyl-4-{4-[3-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-phenoxy]-benzyloxy}-phenyl)-ethanone and 1-(2-hydroxy-4-{3-[4-(2H-tetrazol-5-yl)-pyridin-2-yloxy]-benzyloxy}-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-ethanone is preferred.
A compound of formula I which is 6-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinic acid is more preferred.
Further embodiments of the invention include a process for preparing the compound of formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, comprising (A) for a compound of formula I where Z is tetrazolyl, R
O N-N
z X.Y.~ L.~/ N N
t I
i z H
I, Z is tetrazolyl cycloaddition of a compound of formula II where R10 is cyano with an azide reagent;

O \
HO I XlY, ~ L, ~ CN
i z Rz II, R10 is cyano (B) for a compound of formula I where Z is COOH, R
O \
HO I X'Y'~ L,~ COOH
i z Rz I, Z is COOH

hydrolysis of a compound of formula II where R10 is carboxylic acid ester;
R

OHO
I X-Y, ~ L, ~ COOR
i z Rz II, R10 is COOR

(C) for a compound of formula I where Z is COOH, R

O ~
HO I/ X'Y'~: L, ~ COOH
i z Rz I, Z is COOH
hydrolysis of a compound of formula II where R10 is cyano; and O
HO X'I', ~: L, ~; CN
i z Rz II, R10 is cyano wliereafter, when a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound of formula I is required, it is obtained by reacting the acid of formiila I with a physiologically acceptable base or by reacting a basic compound of formula I with a physiologically acceptable acid or by any other conventional procedure.
Chemical Abstracts discloses 5-[[6-[(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)-methyl]-2-pyridinyl]methoxy]-2-butoxybenzoic acid ethyl ester.
A further embodiment of the present invention provides intermediate compounds useful for the preparation of a compound of formula I. More specifically, the present invention provides a compound of formula II

RI
O ~
HO I X.Y.~ L.~ Rio i z Rz II
wherein Rl, R2, X, Y, Arl, Ar2 and L are defined as above; and R10 is CN or COOR14 in which R14 is selected from the group consisting of C1-C5 alkyl, phenyl and benzyl; other than 5-[[6-[(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)-methyl]-2-pyridinyl]methoxy]-2-butoxybenzoic acid ethyl ester. A particular value of R14 is methyl.
Compounds of the present invention may be made by a process which is analogous to one known in the chemical art for the production of structurally analogous compounds or by a novel process described herein. Such processes useful for the manufacture of a compound of formula I as defined above are provided as further features of the invention and are illustrated by the following procedures in which, unless otherwise specified, the meanings of the generic radicals are as defined above and all reagents are well known and appreciated in the art.
Generally, a compound of formula I may be prepared from a compound of formula II where R10 represents a precursor to Z (Reaction Scheme A, step a).
More specifically, a compound of formula II where R10 is carboxylic acid ester or nitrile is reacted with a suitable base such as potassium hydroxide in a suitable solvent such as water to provide a compound of formula I where Z is carboxylic acid.
Additionally, a compound of formula II where R10 is cyano is reacted with an azide reagent to provide a compound of formula I where Z is tetrazolyl. Azide reagents include HN3 wherein HN3 is provided from the reaction of sodium azide and a protic acid such as triethylamine hydrochloride and ammonium chloride. The reaction is conveniently in a solvent such solutions of water and an organic co-solvent wherein the organic cosolvent is an alcohol such as isopropyl alcohol or a tertiary amide such as N-methyl pyrrolidinone.
Other examples of azide reagents include transition metal azide complexes such as provided from the reaction of zinc bromide and sodium azide, as well as the trialkylsilylazides such as trimethylsilylazide. A compound of formula II where R10 is an acid halide is reacted in one or more steps with cyclocondensating agents to provide a compound of formula I

where Z is H , H

S O
~-.j N H \~ N-O
O
H
N~ -O N
S N~ N~
N-O H
SH NHz A compound of formula of II may be prepared from a compound of fonnula III
(Reaction Scheme A, step b) or, alternatively, from a compound of fonnula V
(Reaction Scheme A, step c). More specifically in step b, a compound of formula III
where X is 0 is reacted under Mitsunobu conditions with a compound of formula IV where R11 is OH
in the presence of an organophosphine such as tributylphosphine and an appropriate azodicarbonyl reagent such as 1,1'-(azodicarbonyl)dipiperidine to provide a compound of formula II. Suitable solvents include toluene and dichloromethane. In step b, a compound of formula II may also be prepared by reacting a compound of formula III
wliere X is 0, S, NH with a compound of formula IV where R11 is a leaving group in the presence of a suitable base such as cesium carbonate and a suitable solvent such as acetone. Suitable leaving groups include halides such as iodide, and sulfonate esters such as methanesulfonate ester.
Reaction Scheme A
R' R
0 I + O + Ri o HO X-H Ri i Z'=~; L.~ Rio I/ Y. .Riz R13 ~z , i z HO X Arl R Rz III IV V vi step b\ /step c R' HO I X.Y.~ L.~ Ri0 l z Rz II

step a HO X-Y,~ L,Ar z i z Rz I

Alternatively, a compound of formula of II may be prepared from a compound of formula V (Reaction Scheme A, step c) where R12 is an appropriate precursor to the group L. More specifically, a compound of formula V where Arl is pyridinediyl and R12 is a leaving group is reacted with a compound of formula VI where R13 is thiol in a solvent such dimethylformamide to provide a compound of formula II where L is S.
Suitable leaving groups include a halide such as chloride.
A compound of formula III where R2 is halo, phenyl, substituted phenyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl and the like maybe prepared from a compound of formula VII (Reaction Scheme B). More specially, a compound of forniula VII
where X
is 0 is reacted under the appropriate halogenation conditions to provide a compound of formula III where X is 0 and R2 is a halogen such as chloro, bromo or iodo. A
compound of formula III where X is 0 and R2 is a halogen such as chloro, bromo or iodo is reacted with a boronic acid of phenyl, substituted phenyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl and the like in the presence of a transition metal catalyst such as Pd(dppf)2Cl2 and a base such as cesium hydroxide to provide a compound of formula III where R2 is the corresponding phenyl, substituted phenyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl and the like.
The reaction is conveniently carried out in a solvent such as solutions of tetrahydrofuran and water.
Reaction Scheme B

0 aX-H 0 q HO ~ HO X-H

VII III
A compound of formula III where X is S may be prepared from a compound of formula III where X is O. More specifically, a coinpound of formula III where X is 0 is reacted with dimethylthiocarbamoyl chloride in a suitable solvent such as dichloromethane. The resulting thiocarbamate is heated in a suitable solvent such as dodecane and treated with sodium hydroxide to provide a compound of formula III where X is S.

A compound of formula III may also be prepared from a compound of formula IX
where the group Pg represents a suitable protecting group (Reaction Scheme C).
More specifically in step a, a compound of formula IX where R2 is a halogen such iodo or bromo and Pg is methyl, is reacted with a boronic acid of phenyl, substituted phenyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl and the like in the presence of a transition metal catalyst such as Pd(dppf)2C12 and a base such as cesium hydroxide to provide a compound of formula IX where R2 is phenyl, substituted phenyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl and the like, and Pg is methyl. The reaction is conveniently carried out in a solvent such as a solution of tetrahydrofuran and water. Further in step a, a compound of formula IX
where Rz is phenyl, substituted phenyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl and the like is reacted with an Rl acyl halide such as acetyl chloride and a Lewis acid such as aluminum chloride in a suitable solvent to provide a coinpound of formula VIII where R' is methyl and R2 is phenyl, substituted phenyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl and the like.
Suitable solvents include dichloromethane. In step b, a compound of formula VIII where the group Pg is methyl is reacted with deprotection agents such as pyridine hydrochloride in the presence of microwave radiation to provide a compound of formula III
where R2 is phenyl, substituted phenyl, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl and the like.

Reaction Scheme C

R1 R1.
step a O step b pg-O X-Pg pg -OI X-pg HO X-H
RZ Rz 2 LX step c step d VIII
~ III
Br pg-0 X-pg X
Additionally in Reaction Scheme C, a compound of formula III where R2 is C1-C3 fluoroalkyl may be prepared from a compound of formula IX where R2 is a halogen. More specifically, a compound of formula IX where R2 is iodo, X is 0 and Pg is a suitable protecting group such as benzyl is reacted with an alkyl ester of difluoro-fluorosulfonyl-acetic acid in the presence of hexamethylphosphoramide and a transistion metal catalyst such as copper iodide in a suitable solvent to provide a coinpound of formula IX where R2 is trifluoromethyl, X is 0, and Pg is benzyl. Suitable solvents include dimethylformamide. In step c, a compound of formula IX where R2 is trifluoromethyl, X is 0, and Pg is benzyl is reacted N-bromosuccinimide in a suitable solvent such as dimethylformamide to provide a compound of formula X. In step d, a compound of formula X is reacted with tributyl-(1-ethoxy-vinyl)-stannane and a transition metal catalyst such as tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium in a solvent such as dioxane followed by acid hydrolysis to provide a compound of formula VIII
where R' is methyl, R2 is trifluoromethyl, X is 0, and Pg is benzyl. In step b, a compound of formula VIII where Rl is methyl, R2 is trifluoromethyl, X is 0, and Pg is benzyl is reacted with a transistion metal catalyst such as palladium hydroxide in the presence of an effective hydrogen source such as cyclohexene to provide a compound of formula III
where Rl is methyl, R2 is trifluoromethyl, and X is O. Suitable solvents include ethanol.
A compound of formula IV where L is 0 may be prepared under aryl ether forming conditions as outlined in Reaction Scheme D. More specifically in step a, a compound of formula XII where R10 represents a precursor to Z is reacted with a compound of formula XI where A is N and R14 is chloro in the presence of a suitable base such as potassium carbonate to provide a compound of formula XIII where A is N. The reaction is conveniently carried out in a solvent such as dimethylacetamide.
Analogously, a compound of formula XII where R10 represents a precursor to Z is reacted with a coinpound of formula XI where A is CH and R14 is fluoro in the presence of a suitable base such as potassium carbonate to provide a compound of formula XIII where A
is CH.
The reaction is conveniently carried out in a solvent such as dimethylacetamide.

Reaction Scheme D

OHC Rlo OHC Rlo HO Rlo \ + step a A a,- / step b I\ O/ I

14 HO\ I O\ I / \
A
A R

XI XII XIII IVa A N; R14=C1 A=CH, N A=CH, N
A=CH; R14=F

HO + Rlo step c HO Rlo /

XIV XVa IVb A N; R14=C1 A=CH, N
A=CH; R14=F

In Reaction Scheme D, step b, a compound of formula XIII where A is CH or N is reacted witli a reducing agent such as sodium borohydride in a suitable solvent such as methanol to provide a compound of formula IVa where A is CH or N. In step c, a coinpound of formula XVa where A is N and R14 is chloro or alternatively a compound where A is CH and R14 is fluoro is reacted with a compound of formula XIV in the presence of a suitable base such as potassium carbonate to provide a compound of formula IVb where A is N or CH. The reaction is conveniently carried out in a solvent such as dimethylacetamide.
A compound of formula IV where L is S(O)p and p is 0,1 or 2 may be prepared from a compound of formula XVb as outlined in Reaction Scheme E. More specifically in step a, a compound of formula XVb where R14 is a halogen such as iodo is reacted with a compound of formula XVI, copper (I) chloride and a suitable base such as cesium carbonate to provide a compound of formula IVc. The reaction is conveniently carried out in a solvent such as N-methylpyrrolidinone. In step b, a compound of formula IVc is reacted with a suitable oxidizing agent such as potassium peroxymonosulfate in a solvent such as methanol to provide a compound of formula IVd where p is 1 or 2.

Reaction Scheme E
Rlo HO \ + / Rlo step a HO \ io Rlo step b HO I\S/ I

I/ 14 \ I I / / SH R S
AP
XVI XVb IVc IVd In Reaction Scheme F step a, a compound of formula XIV is reacted sequentially with a suitable base such as sodium hydride and a compound of formula XVc where R14 is a halogen such as chloro in a suitable solvent such as dimethylformamide to provide a compound of formula XVI. In step b, a compound of formula XVI is reacted with an acyl halide forming agent such as thionyl chloride to form an intermediate acid chloride which is reacted with a suitable~reducing agent such as sodium borohydride in suitable solvent such as dioxane to provide a compound of formula IVe.
Reaction Scheme F

HO Rla HO Rlo HO Rlo + step a I\ / I step b S N S N
XIV XVc XVI IVe The compounds of the present invention can be administered alone or in the form of a pharmaceutical composition, that is, combined with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or excipients, the proportion and nature of which are determined by the solubility and chemical properties of the compound selected, the chosen route of administration, and standard pharmaceutical practice. The compounds of the present invention, while effective themselves, may be formulated and administered in the form of their pharmaceutically acceptable salts, for purposes of stability, convenience of crystallization, increased solubility, and the like.
In practice, the compounds of formula I are usually administered in the form of pharmaceutical compositions, that is, in admixture with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or diluents, the proportion and nature of which are determined by the chemical properties of the selected compound of formula I, the chosen route of administration, and standard pharmaceutical practice.
Thus, the present invention provides pharmaceutical compositions comprising a compound of the formula I and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient.
The compounds of formula I can be administered by a variety of routes. In effecting treatment of a patient afflicted with disorders described above, a compound of formula I can be administered in any fonn or mode which makes the compound bioavailable in an effective amount, including oral and parenteral routes. For example, compounds of formula I can be administered orally, by inhalation, subcutaneously, intramuscularly, intravenously, transdermally, intranasally, rectally, ocularly, topically, sublingually, buccally, and the like. Oral administration is generally preferred for treatment of the neurological and psychiatric disorders described herein.
One skilled in the art of preparing formulations can readily select the proper form and mode of administration depending upon the particular characteristics of the compound selected, the disorder or condition to be treated, the stage of the disorder or condition, and other relevant circumstances. (Remington's Phaf nzaceutical Sciences, 18th Edition, Mack Publishing Co. (1990)).

The phannaceutical compositions of the present invention are prepared in a manner well known in the phannaceutical art. The carrier or excipient may be a solid, semi-solid, or liquid material which can serve as a vehicle or medium for the active ingredient. Suitable carriers or excipients are well known in the art. The pharmaceutical composition may be adapted for oral, inhalation, parenteral, or topical use and may be administered to the patient in the form of tablets, capsules, aerosols, inhalants, suppositories, solution, suspensions, or the like.
The compounds of the present invention may be administered orally, for example, with an inert diluent or capsules or compressed into tablets. For the purpose of oral therapeutic administration, the compounds may be incorporated with excipients and used in the form of tablets, troches, capsules, elixirs, suspensions, syrups, wafers, chewing gums and the like. These preparations should contain at least 4% of the compound of the present invention, the active ingredient, but may be varied depending upon the particular form and may conveniently be between 4% to about 70% of the weight of the unit. The amount of the compound present in compositions is such that a suitable dosage will be obtained. A person skilled in the art may determine preferred compositions and preparations according to the present invention.
The tablets, pills, capsules, troches, and the like may also contain one or more of the following adjuvants: binders such as microcrystalline cellulose, gum tragacanth or gelatin; excipients such as starch or lactose, disintegrating agents such as alginic acid, Primogel, corn starch and the like; lubricants such as magnesium stearate or Sterotex;
glidants such as colloidal silicon dioxide; and sweetening agents such as sucrose or saccharin may be added or a flavoring agent such as peppermint, methyl salicylate or orange flavoring. When the dosage unit form is a capsule, it may contain, in addition to materials of the above type, a liquid carrier such as polyethylene glycol or a fatty oil.
Other dosage unit forms may contain other various materials which modify the physical form of the dosage unit, for example, as coatings. Thus, tablets or pills may be coated with sugar, shellac, or other coating agents. A syrup may contain, in addition to the present compounds, sucrose as a sweetening agent and certain preservatives, dyes and colorings and flavors. Materials used in preparing these various compositions should be pharmaceutically pure and non-toxic in the amounts used.
For the purpose of parenteral therapeutic administration, the compounds of the present invention may be incorporated into a solution or suspension. These preparations typically contain at least 0.1 % of a compound of the invention, but may be varied to be between 0.1 and about 90% of the weight thereof. The amount of the compound of formula I present in such compositions is such that a suitable dosage will be obtained.
The solutions or suspensions may also include one or more of the following adjuvants:
sterile diluents such as water for injection, saline solution, fixed oils, polyethylene glycols, glycerine, propylene glycol or other synthetic solvents;
antibacterial agents such as benzyl alcohol or methyl paraben; antioxidants such as ascorbic acid or sodium bisulfite; chelating agents such as ethylene diaminetetraacetic acid; buffers such as acetates, citrates or phosphates and agents for the adjustment of tonicity such as sodium chloride or dextrose. The parenteral preparation can be enclosed in ampoules, disposable syringes or multiple dose vials made of glass or plastic. Preferred compositions and preparations are able to be determined by one skilled in the art.

The compounds of the present invention may also be administered topically, and when done so the carrier may suitably comprise a solution, ointment, or gel base. The base, for example, may comprise one or more of the following: petrolatum, lanolin, polyethylene glycols, bees wax, mineral oil, diluents such as water and alcohol, and emulsifiers, and stabilizers. Topical formulations may contain a concentration of the formula I or its pharmaceutical salt from about 0.1 to about 10% w/v (weight per unit volume).
The compounds of formula I are potentiators of metabotropic glutamate (mGlu) receptor function, in particular they are potentiators of mGlu2 receptors.
That is the compounds of formula I increase mGlu2 receptor response to glutamate or a glutamate agonist, enhancing the function of the receptors. The behavior of the potentiators of formula I at mGlu2 receptors is shown in Example A which is suitable to identify potentiators useful for carrying out the present invention. Thus, the potentiators of the present invention are expected to be useful in the treatment of various neurological and psychiatric disorders associated with glutainate dysfunction described to be treated herein and others that can be treated by such potentiators as are appreciated by those skilled in the art.
Example A
Potentiation of Glutamate-Induced Increase in Intracellular Calcium with a mGlu2 Expressing Cell Line.
Cell lines expressing human mGlu2 receptors are derived as previously described (Desai, Burnett, Mayne, Schoepp, Mol. Phaf nzacol. 48, 648-657, 1995) and cultured in DMEM with 5% dialyzed fetal bovine serum, 1 mM glutasnine, 1 mM sodium pyruvate, 50 g/mL Geneticin G418, and 0.2 mg/mL hygromycin B. Confluent cultures are passaged weekly. These cells are referred to as RGT cells for Rat Glutamate Transporter, and have been co-transfected with the glutamate/aspartate transporter GLAST.
The RGT
cell line expressing the mGlu2 receptors is stably transfected with the promiscuous G-protein, Galphal 5 to change the signaling pathway to the mGlu2 receptor to one that could be easily measured through release of intracellular calcium. Thus, intracellular calcium levels are monitored before and after the addition of drugs on a Fluorometric Imaging Plate Reader (i.e. FLIPR, Molecular Devices). The following buffer is used throughout as an assay buffer: 10 mM KCI, 138 mM NaC1, 5 mM Ca C12, 1 mM
MgC12, 4 mM Na H2P04, 10 mM Glucose, 10 mM HEPES, pH 7.4. Cells that had been plated 48 hours prior at a density of 30-40,000 cells per well in a 96-well plate are loaded with a calcium-sensitive dye for 90 minutes at 25 C. Fluo-3 (2 mM in DMSO, Molecular Probes) are mixed with a equal volume of 10% pluronic acid in DMSO, and diluted to 8 M into the buffer described above containing 10% fetal bovine serum to make the loading buffer. Following loading of the cells, the loading buffer is removed and replaced with assay buffer prior to drug addition and monitoring on the FLIPR. The resulting signal from the addition of compounds of formula (I) and submaximal concentrations of a glutamate-site agonist (e.g. 1 M glutamate) is determined by taking the difference of the maximal fluorescent peak height minus the background fluorescence in each well and expressing the results as a percent of the signal seen with a maximal glutamate response (30 M glutamate, typically about 30-50,000 Relative Fluorescent Units). Least squares curve fitting with a four-parameter equation is then applied to the resulting dose-%
response curve to determine the resulting EC50 values.
Exemplified compounds of formula I typically affect the potentiation of mGlu2 receptors with EC50 values less than 12.5 M. More specifically, exainples 21, 22, 27, and 84 affect the potentiation of mGlu2 receptors with EC50 values less than 350 nM.
Compounds of formula I are modulators of leukotriene receptor function, in particular they are antagonists of leukotriene receptors. That is the compounds of formula I antagonize the cysteinyl-leukotriene D4 (LTD4) receptor. The behavior of the antagonism of the cysteinyl-leukotriene D4 (LTD4) receptor by compounds of fonnula I
is shown in Example B which is suitable to identify antagonists useful for carrying out the present invention. Thus, the leukotriene antagonists of the present invention are useful in the treatment of various inflammatory and allergic disorders mediated by leukotrienes and described to be treated herein and other disorders that can be treated by such antagonists as are appreciated by those skilled in the art.
Example B
Antagonism of Cysteinyl-leukotriene D4 (LTD4) -Induced Increase in Intracellular Calcium within a Cysteinyl-Leukotriene 1(CysLTl) Receptor Expressing Cell Line.
Cell lines expressing the human CysLT1 receptor [AV12-664 (ATCC-9595)] are derived and maintained in culture media: DMEM with 5% dialyzed fetal bovine serum, 1 mM glutamine, and 1 mM sodium pyruvate. Confluent cultures are passaged weekly.

Intracellular calcium levels are monitored in the CysLTl-expressing cells with the addition of LTD4, with or without prior exposure to the compounds being tested as antagonists with a Fluorometric Imaging Plate Reader (FLIPR, Molecular Devices). The following buffer is used throughout as an assay buffer: Hanks Buffered Saline Solution witliout phenol red (GIBCO), with 10 mM HEPES pH 7.4. Cells that had been plated 48 hours prior at a density of 20-25,000 cells per well in a 96-well plate are loaded with a calcium-sensitive dye for 90 minutes at 25 C. Fluo-3 (2 mM in DMSO, Molecular Probes) is mixed with an equal volume of 10% pluronic acid in DMSO, and diluted to 8 M in the buffer described above containing 10% fetal bovine serum to make the loading buffer. Following loading of the cells, the buffer is reinoved and replaced with assay buffer prior to drug addition and monitoring on the FLIPR for several minutes.
The resulting signal from the addition of 6 nM LTD4 (provides approximately 90% of the maximal signal with 25 nM LTD4) is determined by taking the difference of the maximal fluorescent peak height minus the background fluorescence in each well and expressing the results as a percent of the signal seen without pretreatment of the test compound(s).
Least squares curve fitting with a four-parameter equation is applied to the resulting dose-% inhibition curve to determine the resulting IC50 values.
Exemplified compounds of formula I typically affect the antagonism of CysLTl receptors with IC50 values less than 12.5 M. More specifically, examples 21, 27 and 84 affect the antagonism of CysLTl receptors with IC50 values less than 150 nM.
In one embodiment of the present invention provides methods of treating neurological and psychiatric disorders associated with glutainate dysfunction, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective ainount of a potentiator of metabotropic glutamate 2 receptors.
Specifically, the present invention provides a method of treating neurological and psychiatric disorders associated with glutamate dysfunction, coinprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a potentiator of the mGlu2 receptor and/or antagonist of the CysLT1 receptor, that is, the present invention provides methods using an effective amount of a potentiator of mGlu2 receptors and/or antagonist of the CysLTl receptor.

In a preferred embodiment the present invention provides a method of treating migraine, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of formula I.
In another preferred embodiment the present invention provides a method of treating anxiety, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of formula I.
Particularly preferred anxiety disorders are generalized anxiety disorder, panic disorder, and obsessive compulsive disorder.
In another preferred erimbodiment the present invention provides a metliod of treating schizophrenia, comprising adininistering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of formula I.
In yet another preferred embodiment the present invention provides a method of treating epilepsy, coinprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of formula I.
Because the compounds of formula I enhance the normal physiological function of the mGlu receptors, the compounds of formula I are useful for the treatment of a variety of neurological and psychiatric disorders associated with glutamate dysfunction, including: acute neurological and psychiatric disorders such as cerebral deficits subsequent to cardiac bypass surgery and grafting, stroke, cerebral ischemia, spinal cord trauma, head trauma, perinatal hypoxia, cardiac arrest, hypoglycemic neuronal damage, dementia (including AIDS-induced dementia), Alzheimer's disease, Huntington's Chorea, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, multiple sclerosis, ocular damage, retinopathy, cognitive disorders, idiopathic and drug-induced Parkinson's disease, muscular spasms and disorders associated with muscular spasticity (including tremors) seizures, epilepsy, convulsions, migraine (including migraine headache), urinary incontinence, substance tolerance, substance withdrawal (including, substances such as opiates, nicotine, tobacco products, alcohol, benzodiazepines, cocaine, sedatives, hypnotics, etc.), psychosis, schizophrenia, anxiety (including generalized anxiety disorder, panic disorder, and obsessive compulsive disorder), mood disorders (including depression, mania, bipolar disorders), trigeminal neuralgia, hearing loss, tinnitus, macular degeneration of the eye, emesis, brain edema, pain (including acute and chronic pain states, severe pain, intractable pain, neuropathic pain, and post-traumatic pain), tardive dyskinesia, sleep disorders (including narcolepsy), attention deficit/hyperactivity disorder, and conduct disorder.
At present, the fourth edition of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-IVTM) (1994, American Psychiatric Association, Washington, D.C.), provides a diagnostic tool for identifying many of the disorders described herein. The skilled artisan will recognize that there are alternative nomenclatures, nosologies, and classification systems for neurological and psychiatric disorders described herein and that these systems evolve with medical scientific progress.
The compounds of fonnula I potentiate mGlu receptor response, in particular mGlu2 receptor response, to glutamate and glutamate agonists. Such agonists are easily recognized and some are available in the art. Schoepp, D.D., Jane, D.E., Moim, J.A., Neuropharmacology 3 8 : 1431-1476, (1999).
Thus, a more particular embodiment, it is understood that the present invention extends to a method of potentiating the action of a glutamate receptor agonist at the Group II mGlu receptors, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a mGlu2 potentiator, in particular a compound of formula I, in combination with a potentiated amount of an mGlu receptor agonist. Such a combination may be advantageous in that it may augment the activity and selectivity of mGlu agonist.
As used herein, the term "patient" refers to a warm blooded animal such as a mammal which is afflicted with one or more neurological and psychiatric disorders associated with glutamate dysfunction. It is understood that guinea pigs, dogs, cats, rats, mice, horses, cattle, sheep, and humans, particularly humans, are examples of animals within the scope of the meaning of the term. It is also understood that this invention relates specifically to the potentiation of mammalian metabotropic glutamate receptors.
It is also recognized that one skilled in the art may affect the neurological and psychiatric disorders by treating a patient presently afflicted with the disorders or by prophylactically treating a patient afflicted with the disorders with an effective amount of the compound of formula I. Thus, the terms "treatment" and "treating" are intended to refer to all processes wherein there may be a slowing, interrupting, arresting, controlling, or stopping of the progression of the neurological and psychiatric disorders described herein, but does not necessarily indicate a total elimination of all disorder symptoms, and is intended to include prophylactic treatment of such neurological and psychiatric disorders.
As used herein, the term "effective amount" of a compound of formula I refers to an amount, that is, the dosage which is effective in treating the neurological and psychiatric disorders described herein.
The attending diagnostician, as one skilled in the art, can readily determine an effective amount by the use of conventional techiiiques and by observing results obtained under analogous circumstances. In determining an effective amount, the dose of a compound of formula I, a number of factors are considered by the attending diagnostician, including, but not limited to: the compound of formula I to be administered; the co-administration of an mGlu agonist, if used; the species of mammal;
its size, age, and general liealth; the specific disorder involved; the degree of involvement or the severity of the disorder; the response of the individual patient; the mode of administration; the bioavailability characteristics of the preparation administered; the dose regimen selected; the use of other concomitant medication; and other relevant circumstances.
An effective amount of a compound of formula I is expected to vary from about 0.01 milligram per kilogram of body weight per day (ing/kg/day) to about 100 mg/kg/day.
Preferred amounts may be determined by one skilled in the art.
As used herein, the term "potentiated amount" refers to an amount of an mGlu agonist, that is, the dosage of agonist which is effective in treating the neurological and psychiatric disorders described herein when administered in combination with an effective amount of a coinpound of formula I. A potentiated amount is expected to be less than the amount that is required to provided the same effect when the mGlu agonist is administered without an effective amount of a compound of formula I.
The attending diagnostician, as one slcilled in the art, can readily determine a potentiated amount by the use of conventional techniques and by observing results obtained under analogous circumstances. In determining a potentiated amount, the dose of an mGlu agonist to be administered in combination with a compound of formula I, a number of factors are considered by the attending diagnostician, including, but not limited to: the mGlu agonist selected to be administered, including its potency and selectivity; the compound of formula I to be co-administered; the species of mammal; its size, age, and general health; the specific disorder involved; the degree of involvement or the severity of the disorder; the response of the individual patient; the modes of administration; the bioavailability characteristics of the preparations administered; the dose regimens selected; the use of other concomitant medication; and other relevant circumstances.
A potentiated amount of an mGlu agonist to be administered in coinbination with an effective ainount of a compound of formula I is expected to vary from about 0.1 milligram per kilogram of body weigllt per day (mg/kg/day) to about 100 mg/kg/day and is expected to be less than the amount that is required to provided the same effect when administered without an effective amount of a compound of formula I. Preferred amounts of a co-administered mGlu agonist are able to be determined by one skilled in the art.
Of the neurological and psychiatric disorders associated with glutamate dysfunction which are treated according to the present invention, the treatment of migraine, anxiety, schizophrenia, and epilepsy are particularly preferred.
Particularly preferred anxiety disorders are generalized anxiety disorder, panic disorder, and obsessive compulsive disorder.
Thus, in a preferred embodiment the present invention provides a method of treating migraine, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutical composition thereof.
In one of the available sources of diagnostic tools, Dorland's Medical Dictionary (23'd Ed., 1982, W. B. Saunders Company, Philidelphia, PA), migraine is defined as a symptom complex of periodic headaches, usually temporal and unilateral, often with irritability, nausea, vomiting, constipation or diarrliea, and photophobia. As used herein the term "migraine" includes these periodic headaches, both temporal and unilateral, the associated irritability, nausea, vomiting, constipation or diarrhea, photophobia, and other associated symptoms. The skilled artisan will recognize that there are alternative nomenclatures, nosologies, and classification systems for neurological and psychiatric disorders, including migraine, and that these systems evolve with medical scientific progress.
In another preferred embodiment the present invention provides a method of treating anxiety, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutical composition thereof.

At present, the fourth edition of the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-IVT"") (1994, American Psychiatric Association, Washington, D.C.), provides a diagnostic tool including anxiety and related disorders. These include: panic disorder with or without agoraphobia, agoraphobia without history of panic disorder, specific phobia, social phobia, obsessive-compulsive disorder, post-traumatic stress disorder, acute stress disorder, generalized anxiety disorder, anxiety disorder due to a general medical condition, substance-induced anxiety disorder and anxiety disorder not otherwise specified. As used herein the term "anxiety" includes treatment of those anxiety disorders and related disorder as described in the DSM-IV. The skilled artisan will recognize that there are alternative nomenclatures, nosologies, and classification systems for neurological and psychiatric disorders, and particular anxiety, and that these systems evolve with medical scientific progress. Thus, the term "anxiety" is intended to include like disorders that are described in otlier diagnostic sources.
A number of preclinical laboratory animal models for migraine and anxiety have been described. One commonly used model of migraine is the dural extravasation model that has been described by Phebus et al., Life Sci., 61(21), 2117-2126 (1997) which can be used to evaluate the present compounds.
Example C
Animal Model of Dural Plasma Protein Extravasation (PPE).
Male Harlan Sprague-Dawley rats (250-350 g) are anesthetized with sodium pentobarbital (65 mg/kg, i.p.) and placed in a stereotaxic frame (David Kopf Instruments) with the incisor bar set at -2.5 mm. Following a midline sagital scalp incision, two pairs of bilateral holes are drilled through the skull (3.2 mm posterially, 1.8 and 3.8 mm laterally, all coordinates referenced to bregma). Pairs of stainless steel stimulating electrodes, insulated except at the tips (Rhodes Medical Systems, Inc.), are lowered through the holes in both hemispheres to a depth of 9.2 mm.
The femoral vein is exposed and a dose of the test compound is injected intravenously (i.v.) at a dosing volume of 1 mL/kg. Approximately 8 minutes post i.v.
injection, a 20 mg/kg dose of Fluorescein isothiocyanate-bovine serum albumin (FITC-BSA) is also injected intravenously. The FITC-BSA functions as a marlcer for protein extravasation. Exactly 10 minutes post-injection of the test compound, the left trigeminal ganglion is stimulated for 5 minutes at a current intensity of 1.0 mA (5 Hz, 5 msec duration) with a Model S48 Grass Instrument Stimulator with PSIU6 photoelectric isolation unit (Grass-Telefactor).
Alternatively, rats fasted overnight are dosed orally with test compound via gavage at a volume of 2 mL/kg. Approximately 50 minutes later the animals are anesthetized and placed in the stereotaxic frame as described above. Exactly 58 minutes post-p.o. dosing, the animals are dosed with FITC-BSA (20 mg/kg, i.v.).
Exactly one hour post-p.o. dosing, the aninlals are stimulated as described above.
Five minutes following stimulation, the animals are killed by exsanguination with 40 mL of saline. The top of the skull is removed to facilitate the collection of the dural membranes. The membrane samples are removed from both hemispheres, rinsed with water, and spread flat on microscopic slides. Once dried, the tissues are coverslipped with a 70% glycerol/water solution.
A fluorescence microscope (Zeiss) equipped with a grating monochromator and a spectrophotometer is used to quantify the amount of FITC-BSA in each sample.
An excitation wavelength of approximately 490 nm is utilized and the emission intensity at 535 nm was determined. The microscope is equipped with a motorized stage and also interfaced with a personal computer. This facilitates the computer-controlled movement of the stage with fluorescence measurements at 25 points (500 mm steps) on each dural sample. The mean and standard deviation of the measurements are determined by the computer.
The extravasation induced by the electrical stimulation of the trigeminal ganglion is an ipsilateral effect (i.e. occurs only on the side of the dura in which the trigeminal ganglion was stimulated). This allows the use of the otlier (unstimulated) half of the dura as a control. The ratio of the amount of extravasation in the dura from the stimulated side, over the amount of extravasation in the unstimulated side, is calculated. Control animals dosed only with saline, yield a ratio of approximately 2Ø In contrast, a compound which effectively prevented the extravasation in the dura from the stimulated side would yield a ratio of approximately 1Ø
Examples 21, 22, 27 and 84 affect extravasation in the dura with IDloo values less than or equal to 0.1 mg/kg p.o.
The fear potentiated startle response model has been extensively used as a model of anxiety and can be used to evaluate the present compounds. Davis, Psychopharrnacol., 62, 1 (1979); Davis, Behav. Neuf osci.,100, 814 (1986); Davis, Tr. Pharmacol.
Sci., 13, 35 (1992).
Example D
Fear Potentiated Startle Paradigm.

Male Sprague-Dawley rats weighing 325-400 g are purchased from Harlan Sprague-Dawley, Inc. (Cumberland, IN) and given a one week acclimation period before testing. Rats are individually housed with food and water ad libitum in an animal room on a 12-hour light/dark cycle with lights on between 6:00 A.M. and 6:00 P.M. The test compound of formula I is prepared in a suspension of 5% ethanol, 0.5% CMC, 0.5%
Tween 80 and 99% water. 2S-2-amino-2-(1S,2S-2-carboxycyclopropan-1-yl)-3-(xanth-9-yl) propionic acid is prepared in sterile water. Control rats are given the respective vehicle.
The fear potentiated startle paradigm is conducted over three consecutive days.
All three days begin with a 5-minute adaptation period before the trial starts. On day one (baseline startle) after the adaptation period, the animal receives 30 trials of 120dB
auditory noise. The mean startle amplitude (V,,,a,) is used to assign animals to groups with similar means before conditioning begins. Day two consists of conditioning the animals. Each animal receives 0.5 mA of shock for 500 msec preceded by a 5 second presentation of light which remains on for the duration of the shock. Ten presentations of the light and shock are administered. Day three is the testing trial where drug administration occurs prior to testing. Twenty-four hours after conditioning, startle testing sessions are conducted. Ten trials of acoustic startle (120 dB), non-light paired, are presented at the beginning of the session. This is followed by 20 random trials of the noise alone and 20 random trials of noise preceded by light. Excluding the first 10 trials, the startle response amplitudes for each trial type are averaged for each animal. Data is presented as the difference between light + noise and noise-alone. Differences in startle response amplitudes are analyzed by JMP statistical software using a One-way Anova (analysis of variance, t-test). Group differences are considered to be significant at p<0.05.
In another preferred embodiment the present invention provides a method of treating epilepsy, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of formula I or a pharmaceutical composition thereof.

At present, there are several types and subtypes of seizures associated with epilepsy, including idiopathic, symptomatic, and cryptogenic. These epileptic seizures can be focal (partial) or generalized. They can also be simple or complex.
Epilepsy is described in the art, such as Epilepsy: A comprehensive textbook. Ed. by Jerome Engel, Jr. and Timothy A. Pedley. (Lippincott-Raven, Philadelphia, 1997). At present, the International Classification of Diseases, Ninth Revision, (ICD-9) provides a diagnostic tool including epilepsy and related disorders. These include: generalized nonconvulsive epilepsy, generalized convulsive epilepsy, petit mal status epilepticus, grand mal status epilepticus, partial epilepsy with impairment of consciousness, partial epilepsy witliout impairment of consciousness, infantile spasms, epilepsy partialis continua, other forms of epilepsy, epilepsy, unspecified, NOS. As used herein the term "epilepsy"
includes these all types and subtypes. The skilled artisan will recognize that there are alternative nomenclatures, nosologies, and classification systems for neurological and psychiatric disorders, including epilepsy, and that these systems evolve with medical scientific progress.
Various electroshock-induces models has been extensively used as a model of seizure disorders.
Example E
Electroshock-induced seizures.

Application of electrical stimulation by corneal electrodes to mice can induce tonic hindlimb-extensor seizures. Blockade of tonic extensor seizures induced by electroshock is considered predictive for drugs which block seizure propagation and may be effective in preventing various seizures in humans, including epileptic seizures.
Vehicle or a dose of a test drug are administered to groups of 5 to 10 mice each.
Thirty minutes later, electroshock (10 mA, 0.2 sec duration) is administered by transcorneal electrodes. The number of mice exhibiting tonic extensor seizures in each group is recorded. The data are reported as the percentage of mice that are protected from seizures.
The chemical nomenclature used in the examples and preparations is derived from one or more standard conventions. The skilled artisan will recognize the technical meaning when names are derived from two or more conventions.

The terms used in the examples and preparations have their normal meanings unless otherwise designated. For example, " C" refers to degrees Celsius; "N"
refers to normal or normality; "M" refers to molar or molarity; "mol" refers to mole or moles;
"mmol" refers to millimole or millimoles; "mmol" refers to micromole or micromoles;
"kg" refers to kilogram or kilograms; "g" refers to gram or grams; "mg" refers to microgram or micrograms; "mg" refers to milligram or milligrams; "mL" refers to microliter or microliters; "mL" refers milliliter or milliliters; "L" refers to liter or liters;
"bp" refers to boiling point; "mp" refers to melting point; "brine" refers to a saturated aqueous sodium chloride solution; "h or hr" refers to hour or hours; "min"
refers to minute or minutes; "MS" refers to mass spectrometry; "NMR" refers to nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy; "TFA" refers to trifluoroacetic acid; "CH2C12" or "DCM" refers to dichloromethane; "DCE" refers to dicliloroethane; "MeOH" refers to methanol;
"NH4OH" refers to a concentrated aqueous ammonia solution; "HCl" refers to hydrogen chloride; "MTBE" refers to tert-butyl methyl ether; "DSC" refers to differential scanning calorimetery; "DMEM" refers to Dulbecco's modified eagle medium. Chemical shifts are give in 8 and NMR spectra were obtained in CDC13, unless otherwise indicated.
Preparation 1 Synthesis of 6-(3-hydroxymethyl-phenoxy)-nicotinonitrile.
Add 3-hydroxybenzyl alcohol (0.99 g, 7.94 mmol) and potassium carbonate (1.50 g, 10.83 minol) to 6-chloronicotinitrile (1.00 g, 7.22 mmol) in dimethylacetamide (25 mL) and stir. Heat to 100 C for 4 hrs. Let cool to ambient temperature and pour into water (100 mL). Extract with diethyl ether (3 x 100 mL). Combine the organic layers and wash with 1N NaOH (2 x 50 mL) and dry over magnesium sulfate. Filter and concentrate under reduced pressure to give the product (1.63 g, 99%): 1H NMR
(CDC13) 8.49 (d, J = 2.2 Hz, 1 H), 7.95 (dd, J = 2.2 Hz, 8.7 Hz, 1H), 7.47 (t, J= 7.9 Hz, 1H), 7.29 (s, 1H), 7.21 (s, 1H), 7.10 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 1H), 7.06 (d, J = 8.7 Hz, 1H), 4.77 (s, 2H).
The following compounds are prepared essentially as described in Preparation 1.
Prep.
Chemical name Structure Physical data No.

Prep.
Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
2 6-(4-Hydroxymethyl- Ho N 'H NMR (CDC13) 8.49 (d, phenoxy)- o~rr 2.1 Hz, 1H), 7.96 (d6, J= 2,4 nicotinonitrile Hz, 8.6 Hz, 1H), 7.49 (d, J=
8.6 Hz, 2H), 7.17 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H), 7.07 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 1 H), 4.77 (s, 2H).
3 2-(3-Hydroxymethyl- ~ N~ H NMR (CDC13) 8.33 (dd, J
phenoxy)- HO ~ o~ = 2.1 Hz, 4.9 Hz, 1 H), 8.04 II
nicotinonitrile N (dd, J=1.9 Hz, 7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.44 (t, J = 7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.29 (d, J = 7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.24 (s, 1H), 7.16-7.11 (m, 2H), 4.75 (s, 2H).

4 2-(3-Hydroxymethyl- rr- H NMR (CDC13) 8.35 (d, J
HOJi ~
phenoxy)- ~N = 5.1 Hz, 1H), 7.46 (t, J= 7.8 isonicotinonitrile Hz, 1H), 7.31-7.27 (m, 1H), 7.24 (d, J= 5.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.21-7.18 (m, 2H), 7.09 (d, J
= 8.1 Hz, 1H), 4.77 (s, 2H).

2-(4-Hydroxymethyl- Ho O - 'H NMR (CDC13) 8.35 (d, J
phenoxy)- 0 N\ ~N = 5.0 Hz, 1H), 7.48 (d, J
isonicotinonitrile 8.5 Hz, 2H), 7.23 (d, J = 5.0 Hz, 1H), 7.20 (s, 1H), 7.17 (d, J= 8.5 Hz, 2H), 4.76 (s, 2H).
6 2-(4-Hydroxymethyl- xo~ N H NMR (CDC13) 8.35 (dd, J
phenoxy)- I~ o~ I = 2.0 Hz, 5.0 Hz, 1H), 8.05 nicotinonitrile (dd, J = 2.0 Hz, 7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.49 (d, J 8.5 Hz, 2H), 7.22 Prep.
Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
(d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H), 7.13 (dd, J= 5.0 Hz, 7.5 Hz, 1 H), 4.77 (s, 2H).
7 3-(3-Hydroxymethyl- Ho I) o ~.N 'H NMR. (CDC13) 7.63 (s, phenoxy)-5- 1H), 7.50-7.44 (m, 2H), 7.37 trifluorometliyl- (s, 1 H), 7.32-7.27 (m, 1 H), benzonitrile 7.14 (s, 1H), 7.01 (dd, J = 2.1 Hz, 8.1 Hz, 1H), 4.78 (s, 2H).
8 2-(3- xo ~ N 'H NMR (CDC13) 8.85 (d, J
hydroxymethylphenox o = 2.1 Hz, 1 H), 8.31 (dd, J
y)-nicotinic acid 2.1 Hz, 8.7 Hz, 1 H), 7.46 (t, methyl ester J= 7.9 Hz, 1 H), 7.31-7.27 (m, 1 H), 7.22 (s, 1 H), 7.11 (d, J= 7.9 Hz, 1 H), 6.98 (d, J
= 8.7 Hz, 1H), 4.77 (s, 2H), 3.95 (s, 3H).
9 3-(5-Hydroxymethyl- HO I~ ~ I H NMR (CDC13) 8.17 (s, pyridin-2-yloxy)- N p 1H), 7.83 (dd, J = 2.0 Hz, 8.6 N
benzonitrile Hz, 1H), 7.54-7.49 (m, 2H), 7.47 (s, 1H), 7.44-7.40 (m, 1H), 7.03 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 111), 4.72 (s, 2H).

Preparation 10 Synthesis of 3-(4-formyl-phenoxy)-benzonitrile.
The title compound is prepared essentially as described in Preparation 1 substituting 4-fluorobenzaldehyde (0.85 mL, 8.06 mmol) for 3-hydroxybenzyl alcohol and 3-hydroxybenzonitrile (1.06 g, 8.86 mmol) for 6-chloronicotinitrile. Yield (0.90 g, 50%); 1H NMR (CDC13) 10.01 (s, 1H), 7.95 (d, J= 8.5 Hz, 2H), 7.58-7.52 (m, 2H), 7.39-7.34 (m, 2H), 7.14 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H).
The following compounds are prepared essentially as described in Preparation 10.
Prep. Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
11 2-(4-Formyl- 0 'H NMR (CDC13) 10.01 (s, phenoxy)-benzonitrile H OI~ 1H), 7.96 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 2H), ~ ~ 7.76 (d, J = 7.7 Hz, 1H), 7.70-N 7.61 (m, 2H), 7.20 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.10 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 1H).
12 2-(3-Formyl- H N 'H NMR (CDC13) 10.03 (s, phenoxy)-benzonitrile 0 0 1H), 7.75 (t, J= 7.7 Hz, 2H), 7.63 (t, J = 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.60-7.55 (m, 2H), 7.42 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 1H), 7.26 (t, J = 7.7 Hz, 1H), 6.98 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 1H).
13 3-(5-Formyl-pyridin- 0 H NMR (CDC13) 10.05 (s, 2-yloxy)-benzonitrile H N o~ \ 1 H), 8.64 (d, J= 1.8 Hz, 1 H), N
8.29 (dd, J= 2.2 Hz, 8.6 Hz, 1H)5- 7.61-7.54 (m, 2H), 7.50-7.46 (m, 2H), 7.17 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 1H).

Preparation 14 Synthesis of 3-(4-hydroxymethyl-phenoxy)-benzonitrile.

Dissolve 3-(4-formyl-phenoxy)-benzonitrile of,Preparation 10 (0.90 g, 4.04 mmol) in methanol (15 mL) and cool to 0 C. Add sodium borohydride (0.31 g, 8.08 mmol) in three batches. After 1 hr, allow to warm to ambient temperature and stir overnight. Concentrate under reduced pressure to give a residue. Dilute with ethyl acetate (50 mL) and wash with iN hydrochloric acid (3 x 100 mL). Separate layers and dry the organic layer over magnesium sulfate, filter, and concentrate to a residue.
Purification by flash chromatography, using 10% ethyl acetate/hexanes to 50%
ethyl acetate/hexanes as a gradient eluent gives the title product (0.83 g, 91%): 'H
NMR
(CDC13) 7.48-7.38 (m, 4H), 7.30-7.23 (m, 2H), 7.06 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H), 4.75 (s, 2H).
The following compounds are prepared estentially as described in Preparation 14.
Prep.
No. Chemical name Structure Physical data 2-(4-Hydroxymethyl- Ho 'H NMR (CDC13) 7.69 (d, J
phenoxy)-benzonitrile 7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.50 (t, J = 8.2 iv Hz, 1 H), 7.44 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H), 7.17 (t, J= 7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.11 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 2H), 6.89 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 1H), 4.75 (s, 2H).
16 2-(3-Hydroxymethyl- N 'H NMR (CDC13) 7.70 (d, J
phenoxy)-benzonitrile Ho ~ 0 = 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.51 (t, J= 8.0 ~ Hz, 1H), 7.42 (t, J= 7.8 Hz, 1 H), 7.24 (d, J= 7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.20-7.13 (m, 2H), 7.04 (d, J
= 8.0 Hz, 111), 6.92 (d, J=
8.6 Hz, 1H), 4.75 (s, 2H).
17 4-(3-Hydroxymethyl- Ho'H NMR (CDC13) 7.64 (d, J
phenoxy)-benzonitrile 8.8 Hz, 2H), 7.44 (t, J = 7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.26 (t, J = 7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.13 (s, 1H), 7.06-7.01 (m, 3H), 4.76 (s, 2H).

General Method 1 10 General procedure for the preparation of regioisomers of (hydroxymethyl-phenylsulfanyl)-benzonitrile.

S
HO ~I I~ CN

Add 2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-heptane-3,5-dione (0.250 mmol) to a solution of copper (I) chloride (0.500 mmol) in N-methylpyrrolidinone (0.300 .111). Add cesium carbonate (2.00 mmol), the appropriate iodobenzonitrile (1.00 mmol), then the appropriate hydroxymethylthiophenol (2.00 mmol) and stir for 6 hours at 130 C. Dilute with ethyl acetate and wash with water. Dry and concentrate organic layer. Purify the residue by flash chromatography, eluting with hexanes, ramping to 50% ethyl acetate/hexanes to provide the title compound listed below.

Prep. Chemical Name Physical Data No.
18 3-(4-Hydroxymethyl- MS (m/z): 242 (M+l).
phenylsulfanyl)-benzonitrile 19 3-(2-Hydroxymethyl- 'H NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) 8 4.77 (s, 2H), 7.34 phenylsulfanyl)-benzonitrile (m, 4H), 7.45 (m, 1H), 7.49 (m, 2H), 7.60 (m, 1 H) 20 4-(3-Hydroxymethyl- 'H NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) 8 4.72 (s, 2H), 7.18 phenylsulfanyl)-benzonitrile (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 2H), 7.42 (s, 3H), 7.48 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 2H), 7.53 (s, 1H) 21 4-(2-Hydroxyinethyl- 'H NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) 8 4.76 (s, 2H), 7.06 phenylsulfanyl)-benzonitrile (d, J = 7.6 Hz, 2H), 7.38 (t, J= 11.3 Hz, 1H), 7.46 (d, J= 8.6 Hz, 2H), 7.51 (in, 2H), 7.64 (d, J
= 7.0 Hz, 1H) 22 2-(4-Hydroxymethyl- 'H NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) S 4.73 (s, 2H), 7.13 phenylsulfanyl)-benzonitrile (d, J= 8.6 Hz, 1H), 7.26 (m, 2H), 7.40 (d, J= 8.6 Hz, 2H), 7.47 (d, J= 6.2 Hz, 2H), 7.63 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H).
23 2-(3-Hydroxymethyl- 'H NMR (400 MHz, CDC13) S 4.69 (s, 2H), 7.18 phenylsulfanyl)-benzonitrile (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 1 H), 7.27 (m, 1 H), 7.3 8 (s, 3H), 7.41 (m, 1 H), 7.48 (s, 1 H), 7.64 (d, J= 9.4 Hz, Prep. Chemical Name Physical Data No.
1H).
24 4-(4-Hydroxymethyl- MS (m/z): 242 (M+1).
phenylsulfanyl)-benzonitrile 25 3-(4-Hydroxymethyl- MS (m/z): 242 (M+1).
phenylsulfanyl)-benzonitrile 26 3-(3-Hydroxymethyl- MS (m/z): 289 (M+1).
phenylsulfanyl)-benzoic acid ethyl ester 27 3-(4-Hydroxymethyl- MS (m/z): 289 (M+1).
phenylsulfanyl)-benzoic acid ethyl ester 28 4-(4-Hydroxymethyl- MS (m/z): 275 (M+1).
phenylsulfanyl)-benzoic acid ethyl ester General Method 2 General procedure for the preparation of regioisomers of (hydroxymethyl-benzenesulfonyl)-benzonitriles.

CN
aS~ cr H.5 Add potassium peroxymonosulfate (1.00 g, 1.66 mmol) in water (0.5M) at room temperature to a solution of the appropriate hydroxymethylbenzenesulfanylbenzonitrile (0.829 minol) in methanol (0.2M) at 0 C. Stir overnight and allow solution to warm to room temperature. Dilute with dichloromethane and 2N hydrochloric acid.
Collect organic layer and extract aqueous layer with dichloromethane (3x). Dry organic layers with sodium sulfate and evaporate to dryness to afford the title compound listed below.

Prep. Chemical Name Physical Data No.
29 2-(3-Hydroxymethyl-benzenesulfonyl)-benzonitrile MS (m/z): 274 (M+1)=
30 3-(3-Hydroxymethyl-benzenesulfonyl)-benzonitrile MS (m/z): 274 (M+1).
31 4-(4-Hydroxymethyl-benzenesulfonyl)-benzonitrile MS (m/z): 274 (M+1).
32 3-(4-Hydroxymethyl-benzenesulfonyl)-benzonitrile MS (m/z): 274 (M+1).
33 4-(3-Hydroxymethyl-benzenesulfonyl)-benzonitrile MS (m/z): 274 (M+1).
34 3-(3-Hydroxymethyl-benzenesulfonyl)-benzoic acid MS (m/z): 321 ethyl ester (M+1).

35 3-(4-Hydroxymethyl-benzenesulfonyl)-benzoic acid MS (m/z): 321 ethyl ester (M+1).

36 4-(4-Hydroxymethyl-benzenesulfonyl)-benzoic acid MS (m/z): 307 methyl ester (M+1).
General Method 3 General procedure for the preparation of regioisomers of (hydroxymethyl-benzenesulfinyl)-benzonitrile.
O
~ S ~ CN
HO ~ ~ I i Add potassium peroxymonosulfate (1.00 g, 0.829) in water (0.5M) at 0 C to a solution of the appropriate hydroxymethylbenzenesulfanylbenzonitrile (0.829 mmol) in methanol (0.2M) at 0 C over 1 min. Quench reaction after 10 min with sodium bisulfite (sat). Dilute the mixture with 2N hydrochloric acid and extract with ethyl acetate (3x).
Dry the organic layers with sodium sulfate and concentrate to dryness. Purify the resulting residue by flash chromatography, eluting with hexanes to 50% ethyl acetate/hexanes to provide the title compound listed below.

Prep. Chemical Naine Physical Data No.
37 3-(2-Hydroxymethyl-benzenesulfinyl)-benzonitrile MS (m/z): 258 (M+1).
38 2-(3-Hydroxymethyl-benzenesulfmyl)-benzonitrile MS (m/z): 258 (M+1).
39 4-(4-Hydroxymethyl-benzenesulfmyl)-benzonitrile MS (m/z): 258 (M+1).
40 3-(4-Hydroxymethyl-benzenesulfmyl)-benzonitrile MS (m/z): 258 (M+l).
41 3-(3-Hydroxymethyl-benzenesulfinyl)-benzonitrile MS (m/z): 258 (M+l).
Preparation 42 Synthesis of 6-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxyinethyl)-phenoxy]-nicotinonitrile.
Mix 6-(3-hydroxymethyl-phenoxy)-nicotinonitrile (1.63 g, 7.18 mmol) and 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-propyl-phenyl)-ethanone (1.33 g, 6.84 mmol) in 2:1 toluene/dichloromethane (24 mL). Cool to -20 C and add tributylphosphine (2.6 mL, 10.26 mmol) dropwise. After stirring for 5 minutes, add 1,1'-(azodicarbonyl)dipiperidine in three batches. Allow the reaction mixture to warm to ambient temperature overnight.
Concentrate under reduced pressure to give a yellow solid. Dilute with diethyl ether (50 mL) and cool to 0 C. Filter the white precipitate and concentrate the filtrate under reduced pressure to give a residue. Purification by flash chromatography, using 5% ethyl acetate/hexanes to 30% ethyl acetate/hexanes as a gradient eluent yields the title compound (0.91 g, 33%): MS (m/z): 401.2 (M-1). 1H NMR (CDC13) 12.78 (s, 1H), 8.50 (s, 1H), 7.97 (dd, J= 2.2 Hz, 8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.62 (d, J= 8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.51 (t, J= 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.36 (d, J = 7.8 Hz, 1 H), 7.25 (s, 1 H), 7.16 (d, J= 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.09 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 1H), 6.51 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 1H), 5.22 (s, 2H), 2.72 (t, J = 7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.60 (s, 3H), 1.62-1.53 (m, 2H), 0.94 (t, J = 7.6 Hz, 3H).

Preparation 43 Synthesis of 2-[3-(3-hydroxy-2-methyl-4-propionyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenoxy]-isonicotinonitrile.

Mix polymer-supported triphenylphosphine (2.33 mmol/g load capacity, 0.85 g, 1.99 mmol), imidazole (0.14 g, 1.99 mmol) and iodine (0.51 g, 1.99 mmol) in dichloromethane (8 mL) in a vial (0.75 oz). Seal and shake for 10 minutes. Add a solution of 2-(3-hydroxymethyl-phenoxy)-isonicotinonitrile (0.30 g, 1.33 mmol) in dichloromethane (3 mL) and shake for 2 hrs. Filter the resin and wash with dichloromethane (50 mL). Concentrate the filtrate under reduced pressure to give a residue. Dissolve the residue in ethyl acetate (25 mL), wash with saturated sodium thiosulfate solution (2 x 25 mL) and dry over sodium sulfate. Filter and concentrate to give 2-(3-iodomethyl-phenoxy)-isonicotinonitrile as a yellow solid (0.25 g, 53%). Mix the yellow solid (0.25 g, 0.70 mmol), 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-methyl-phenyl)-propan-l-one (0.14 g, 0.77 mmol) and cesium carbonate (0.25 g, 0.77 mmol) in acetone (7 mL). Heat to 50 C for 2.5 hrs. Allow the reaction to cool to ambient temperature and concentrate under reduced pressure to give a solid. Dilute with ethyl acetate (25 mL) and filter.
Concentrate the filtrate under reduced pressure to give an oil. Triturate with methanol (50 mL) and filter to give a solid. Purification by flash chromatography using 5%
ethyl acetate/hexanes to 20% ethyl acetate/hexanes as gradient eluent yields the title compound (0.16 g, 60%): MS (m/z): 387.2 (M-1). 1H NMR (CDC13) 12.91 (s, 1H), 8.34 (d, J= 5.1 Hz, 1H), 7.65 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.50 (t, J = 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.36 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.31-7.24 (m, 2H), 7.21 (s, 1H), 7.15 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 6.51 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 5.23 (s, 2H), 3.00 (q, J = 7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.19 (s, 3H), 1.26 (t, J = 7.5 Hz, 3H).

Preparation 44 Synthesis of 3-[4-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-trifluoromethyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenoxy]-benzonitrile.
3-(4-Iodomethyl-phenoxy)-benzonitrile is prepared by an analogous procedure described in Preparation 43. Add half of a solution of 3-(4-iodomethyl-phenoxy)-benzonitrile (470 mg, 1.4 mmol) in anhydrous dimethylformamide (10 mL) to 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-ethanone (300 mg, 1.4 mmol) and Li2CO3 (228 mg, 3.1 mmol) in anhydrous dimethylformamide (18 mL)dimethylformamide. Heat the reaction mixture to 60 C and stir for 1 h. Add the other half of the 3-(4-iodomethyl-phenoxy)-benzonitrile solution to the reaction mixture. Stirred at 60 C for an additional lh, cool to room temperature, and quench with water (75 mL). Extract the aqueous mixture with ethyl acetate (3 x 75 mL). Combine the organic layers, wash with brine, dry over sodium sulfatesodium sulfate, and concentrate. Purify the residue by flash column chromatography using 50% ethyl acetate/hexane as the eluent to give the title compound (302 mg, 50%). LC-MS (m/e): 426 (M-1) The following compounds are prepared esentially as described for Preparation 42, 43 or 44. The corresponding method is designated in the table below.

Prep.
Method Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
45 Method of 2-[4-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (m/z): 400.2 (M-1).
o ~
Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- ~ 1H NMR (CDC13) 12.79 42 phenoxymethyl)- o~ I (s, 1 H), 7.71 (d, J = 8.0 phenoxy]- N Hz, 1H), 7.63 (d, J 8.8 benzonitrile Hz, 1H), 7.53 (t, J 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.48 (d, J 8.2 Hz, 2H), 7.19 (t, J= 7.6 Hz, 111), 7.15 (d, J 8.2 Hz, 2H), 6.95 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.53 (d, J= 8.8 Hz, 1H), 5.19 (s, 2H), 2.74 (t, J = 7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.61 (s, 3H), 1.66-1.56 (m, 2H), 0.99 (t, J = 7.5 Hz, 3H).
46 Method of 6-[4-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (m/z): 401.2 (M-1).
0 ~~
Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- xo ~ o O 1H NMR (CDC13) 12.79 42 phenoxymethyl)- 0 N (s,.1H), 8.51 (s, 1H), phenoxy]- 7.97 (dd, J= 2.2 Hz, 8.8 nicotinonitrile Hz, 1H), 7.64 (d, J= 9.1 Hz, 1H), 7.53 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.22 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.09 (d, J= 8.8 Hz, 1H), 6.55 (d, J= 9.1 Hz, 1H), 5.22 (s, 2H), 2.74 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.61 (s, 3H), 1.67-1.57 (m, 2H), 0.99 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 3H).

Prep.
Method Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
47 Method of 2-[3-(4-Acetyl-3- N MS (m/z): 401.2 (M-1).
0 1~
Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- HO ( 0 o 'H NMR (CDC13) 12.78 42 phenoxymethyl)- N, (s, 1H), 8.35 (dd, J= 1.8 phenoxy]- Hz, 5.1 Hz, 1H), 8.06 nicotinonitrile (dd, J = 1.8 Hz, 7.7 Hz, 111), 7.62 (d, J 9.0 Hz, 111), 7.51 (t, J 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.36 (d, J 7.7 Hz, 1 H), 7.20 (d, J 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.16 (d, J 5.1 Hz, 111), 7.14 (d, J 5.1 Hz, 1H), 6.51 (d, J 9.0 Hz, 1H), 5.23 (s, 2H), 2.72 (t, J= 7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.60 (s, 3H), 1.63-1.53 (m, 2H), 0.94 (t, J = 7.3 Hz, 3H).

Prep.
Method Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
48 Method of 2-[3-(4-Acetyl-3- N MS (m/z): 400.2 (M-1).
0 Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- HO ) o o 1H NMR (CDC13) 12.78 42 phenoxymethyl)- I' ~ I (s, 1H), 7.71 (dd, J = 1.5 phenoxy]- Hz, 7.7 Hz, 1H), 7.61 benzonitrile (d, J 9.1 Hz, 1H), 7.51 (t, J 7.9 Hz, 1 H), 7.46 (t, J 7.7 Hz, 1 H), 7.31-7.27 (m, 1 H), 7.20 (t, J
= 7.7 Hz, 1 H), 7.16 (s, 1H), 7.09 (d, J = 7.9 Hz, 1 H), 6.93 (d, J= 8.6 Hz, 1H), 6.49 (d, J= 9.1 Hz, 1H), 5.20 (s, 2H), 2.69 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.60 (s, 3H), 1.62-1.52 (m, 2H), 0.93 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 3H).

Prep.
Method Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
49 Method of 2-[3-(3-Hydroxy- MS (m/z): 387.2 (M-1).
~
Preparation 2-methyl-4- Ho (~ o o~ I%N 'H NMR (CDC13) 12.91 N.
43 propionyl- (s, 1H), 8.34 (d, J= 5.1 phenoxymethyl)- Hz, 1H), 7.65 (d, J 9.0 phenoxy]- Hz, 1H), 7.50 (t, J 8.0 isonicotinonitrile Hz, 1H), 7.36 (d, J 7.8 Hz, 1 H), 7.31-7.24 (m, 2H), 7.21 (s, 1 H), 7.15 (d, J= 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 6.51 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 5.23 (s, 2H), 3.00 (q, J = 7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.19 (s, 3H), 1.26 (t, J = 7.5 Hz, 3H).
50 Method of 2-[4-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (m/z): 401.1 (M-1).
o Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- Ho N 'H NMR (CDC13) 12.80 42 phenoxymethyl)- "N (s, 1H), 8.37 (d, J = 5.1 phenoxy] - Hz, 1 H), 7.64 (d, J = 9.2 isonicotinonitrile Hz, 1H), 7.52 (d, J= 8.5 Hz, 2H), 7.25 (d, J = 5.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.22 (d, J= 8.5 Hz, 2H), 6.54 (d, J= 9.2 Hz, 1 H), 5.21 (s, 2H), 2.75 (t, J = 7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.61 (s, 3H), 1.67-1.57 (m, 2H), 0.99 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 3H).

Prep.
Method Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
51 Method of 2-[4-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (m/z): 401.2 (M-1).
o ~
Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- N 'H NMR (CDC13) 12.79 42 phenoxymethyl)- o~ (s, 1H), 8.37 (dd, J= 2.1 phenoxy]- N Hz, 5.2 Hz, 1H), 8.06 nicotinonitrile (dd, J = 2.1 Hz, 7.7 Hz, 1H), 7.63 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, 1H), 7.53 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.27 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.15 (dd, J = 5.2 Hz, 7.7 Hz, 1H), 6.54 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, 111), 5.22 (s, 2H), 2.75 (t, J = 7.6 Hz, 2H), 2.61 (s, 3H), 1.67-1.57 (m, 2H), 0.99 (t, J = 7.6 Hz, 3H).

52 Method of 2-[3-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (m/z): 401.1 (M-1).

Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- xo o ~~ ~ 'H NMR (CDC13) 12.78 i 43 phenoxymethyl)- (s, 1H), 8.35 (d, J = 5.1 phenoxy]- Hz, 1H), 7.61 (d, J 9.0 isonicotinonitrile Hz, 1H), 7.50 (t, J 7.9 Hz, 1H), 7.34 (d, J 7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.26-7.23 (m, 2H), 7.21 (s, 1 H), 7.14 (d, J= 8.1 Hz, 1H), 6.50 (d, J= 9.1 Hz, 1 H), 5.22 (s, 2H), 2.71 (t, J = 7.3 Hz, 2H), 2.59 (s, 3H), 1.63-1.53 (m, 2H), 0.93 (t, J = 7.3 Hz, 3H).

Prep.
Method Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
53 Method of 4-[3-(3-Hydroxy- H NMR (CDC13) 12.91 Preparation 2-methyl-4- xo (~ o (s, 1H), 7.67-7.62 (m, 43 propionyl- I~ ~I-rr 3H), 7.47 (t, J 8.1 Hz, phenoxymethyl)- 1H), 7.32 (d, J 7.8 Hz, phenoxy]- 1H), 7.18 (s, 1H), 7.08-benzonitrile 7.03 (m, 3H), 6.50 (d, J
= 8.9 Hz, 111), 5.19 (s, 2H), 3.00 (q, J= 7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.18 (s, 3H), 1.26 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H).

Prep.
Method Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
54 Method of 4-[3-(4-Acetyl-3- 'H NMR (CDC13) 12.78 0 Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- xo ( oo, (s, 1H), 7.64 (d, J = 8.5 I~ ~I \
43 phenoxymethyl)- -N Hz, 2H), 7.62 (d, J 9.1 phenoxy]- Hz, 1H), 7.47 (t, J 7.8 benzonitrile Hz, 1H), 7.32-7.27 (m, 2H), 7.17 (s, 1H), 7.06 (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H), 6.50 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, 1 H), 5.19 (s, 2H), 2.70 (t, J = 7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.60 (s, 3H), 1.61-1.52 (m, 2H), 0.93 (t, J = 7.5 Hz, 3H).
55 Method of 3-[3-(3-Hydroxy- MS (m/z): 454.1 (M-1).
Preparation 2-methyl-4- Ho 1~ o o~ %N 1H NMR (CDC13) 12.92 43 propionyl- ~ I CF3 (s, 1H), 7.66 (d, J = 9.1 phenoxymethyl)- Hz, 1 H), 7.64 (s, 1 H), phenoxy]-5- 7.54-7.49 (m, 2H), 7.40-trifluoromethyl- 7.35 (m, 2H), 7.16 (s, benzonitrile 1H), 7.06 (dd, J= 2.2 Hz, 8.2 Hz, 1H), 6.49 (d, J= 9.1 Hz, 1H), 5.23 (s, 2H), 3.01 (q, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.19 (s, 3H), 1.26 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H).

Prep.
Method Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
56 Method of 3-[4-(3-Hydroxy- MS (m/z): 386.1 (M-1).
Preparation 2-methyl-4- Ho o 'H NMR (CDC13) 12.92 43 propionyl- o~ -rr (s, 1H), 7.67 (d, J = 9.0 phenoxymethyl)- Hz, 1 H), 7.51-7.40 (m, phenoxy]- 4H), 7.31-7.26 (m, 2H), benzonitrile 7.09 (d, J= 8.5 Hz, 2H), 6.54 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 5.19 (s, 2H), 3.01 (q, J =
7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.21 (s, 3H), 1.27 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 3H).
57 Method of 6-[3-(3-Hydroxy- MS (m/z): 420.1 (M-1).
~
Preparation 2-methyl-4- Ho (~ o~o 'H NMR (CDC13) 12.91 43 propionyl- I~ \ I o o' (s, 111), 8.85 (s, 1H), phenoxyinethyl)- 8.32 (dd, J= 2.1 Hz, 8.5 phenoxy]- Hz, 1H), 7.65 (d, J 8.8 nicotinic acid Hz, 1H), 7.49 (t, J= 8.0 methyl ester Hz, 1H), 7.34 (d, J 7.7 Hz, 1H), 7.30-7.26 (m, 2H), 7.16 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.00 (d, J= 8.8 Hz, 1H), 5.22 (s, 2H), 3.96 (s, 3H), 3.00 (q, J = 7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.19 (s, 3H), 1.26 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3H).

Prep.
Method Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
58 Method of 6-[3-(3-Hydroxy- MS (m/z): 387.1 (M-1).
Preparation 2-methyl-4- Ho (~ o o~ 1H NMR (CDC13) 12.92 43 propionyl- N~ I~rr (s, 1H), 8.50 (d, J= 2.0 phenoxymethyl)- Hz, 114), 7.97 (dd, J
phenoxy]- 2.2 Hz, 8.8 Hz, 1 H), nicotinonitrile 7.65 (d, J 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.51 (t, J 7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.3 8 (d, J 7.8 Hz, 1 H), 7.30-7.26 (m, 2H), 7.16 (dd, J= 2.0 Hz, 7.8 Hz, 1 H), 6.51 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 5.23 (s, 2H), 3.01 (q, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.19 (s, 3H), 1.26 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H).
59 Metliod of 6-[3-(4-Acetyl-2- MS (m/z): 377.0 (M-1).
o Preparation fluoro-3-hydroxy- xo o o N~ 'H NMR (CDC13) 12.50 43 phenoxymethyl)- (s, 1H), 8.49 (s, 1H), phenoxy]- 7.97 (dd, J = 2.0 Hz, 8.8 nicotinonitrile Hz, 1H), 7.54-7.48 (m, 2H), 7.3 8 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.28 (s, 1 H), 7.17 (d, J= 8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.09 (d, J= 8.8 Hz, 1H), 6.58 (dd, J= 7.1 Hz, 8.8 Hz, 1H), 5.30 (s, 2H), 2.62 (s, 3H).

Prep.
Method Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
60 Method of 6-[3-(4-Acetyl-2- 0 \ MS (m/z): 393.0 (M-1).
Preparation chloro-3-hydroxy- Ho ~ ~i o o N 'H NMR (CDC13) 13.19 43 phenoxymethyl)- N (s, 1H), 8.49 (s, 1H), phenoxy]- 7.97 (dd, J= 2.1 Hz, 8.6 nicotinonitrile Hz, 1H), 7.68 (d, J 9.1 Hz,1H),7.52(t,J7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.40 (d, J 7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.31 (s, 1 H), 7.17 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 1H), 7.09 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 1H), 6.60 (d, J= 9.1 Hz, 1H), 5.31 (s, 2H), 2.63 (s, 3H).

61 Method of 6-[3-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (m/z): 373.0 (M-1).
~
Preparation hydroxy-2- xo ~~ o ao N 'H NMR (CDC13) 12.82 43 methyl- \~\N (s, 1H), 8.50 (d, J = 2.1 phenoxymethyl)- Hz, 1H), 7.97 (dd, J
phenoxy]- 2.4 Hz, 8.8 Hz, 1H), nicotinonitrile 7.62 (d, J 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.51 (t, J 8.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.3 8 (d, J 7.9 Hz, 1 H), 7.27 (s, 1H), 7.16 (d, J =
7.9Hz,1H),7.09(d,J=
8.8 Hz, 1H), 6.52 (d, J =
9.0 Hz, 1 H), 5.23 (s, 2H), 2.61 (s, 3H), 2.19 (s, 3H).

Prep.
Method Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
62 Method of 2-[3-(4-Acetyl-2- MS (m/z): 393.0 (M-1).
~
1H NMR (CDC13) 13.19 Preparation chloro-3-hydroxy- xo 1~ o ( ~ ~ I
CI i N.
43 phenoxymethyl)- (s, 1H), 8.35 (d, J= 5.2 phenoxy]- Hz, 1H), 7.68 (d, J 9.0 isonicotinonitrile Hz, 1H), 7.51 (t, J 7.9 Hz, 1 H), 7.3 8 (d, J 7.7 Hz, 1H), 7.31-7.28 (m, 1H), 7.25 (d, J= 5.2 Hz, 1H), 7.21 (s, 1 H), 7.16 (d, J= 7.9 Hz, 1H), 6.59 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 5.32 (s, 2H), 2.63 (s, 3H).

63 Method of 2-[4-(4-Acetyl-3- 'H NMR (CDC13) 12.82 o (~
Preparation hydroxy-2- xo ~ o rr (s, 1H), 8.37 (d, J = 4.9 43 methyl- I~ \ "*N Hz, 1H), 7.64 (d, J= 9.0 phenoxymethyl)- Hz, 1H), 7.54 (d, J = 8.2 phenoxy]- Hz, 2H), 7.26-7.19 (m, isonicotinonitrile 4H), 6.55 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 5.22 (s, 2H), 2.62 (s, 3H), 2.21 (s, 3H).

Prep.
Method Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
64 Method of 3-[4-(4-Acetyl-3- 'H NMR (CDC13) 12.82 I~
Preparation hydroxy-2- xo o (s, 1H), 7.64 (d, J = 9.0 43 methyl- I \ I~N Hz, 1H), 7.49 (d, J 8.6 phenoxymethyl)- Hz, 2H), 7.47 (t, J 8.0 phenoxy]- Hz, 1H), 7.42 (d, J 7.6 benzonitrile Hz, 1H), 7.32-7.25 (m, 2H), 7.09 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H), 6.55 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 5.20 (s, 2H), 2.61 (s, 3H), 2.21 (s, 3H).

65 Method of 3-[4-(4-Acetyl-3- ~ 'H NMR (CDC13) 12.79 o Preparation hydroxy- (s, 1H), 7.69 (d, J= 8.6 43 phenoxymethyl)- I \ -N Hz, 1H), 7.51-7.40 (m, phenoxy]- 4H), 7.30-7.26 (m, 2H), benzonitrile 7.09 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H), 6.58-6.53 (m, 2H), 5.12 (s, 2H), 2.60 (s, 3H).

66 Method of 3-[5-(4-Acetyl-3- 'H NMR (CDC13) 12.79 o Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- xo o a (s, 1H), 8.25 (s, 1H), 43 phenoxymethyl)- N -N 7.86 (dd, J= 2.2 Hz, 8.2 pyridin-2-yloxy]- Hz, 1H), 7.64 (d, J= 9.1 benzonitrile Hz, 1H), 7.55-7.43 (m, 4H), 7.08 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, 1H), 6.54 (d, J= 9.1 Hz, 1H), 5.15 (s, 2H), 2.69 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.59 (s, 3H), 1.62-1.52 (m, 2H), 0.95 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 3H).

Prep.
Method Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
.
67 Method of 3-[5-(3-Hydroxy- H NMR (CDC13) 12.91 Preparation 2-methyl-4- Ho o ~~ ~ (s, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H), 43 propionyl- N ~ "-, N 7.86 (dd, J= 2.2 Hz, 8.4 phenoxymethyl)- Hz, 1H), 7.66 (d, J = 9.0 pyridin-2-yloxy]- Hz, 1H), 7.54-7.42 (m, benzonitrile 4H), 7.07 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 1H), 6.53 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 5.14 (s, 2H), 2.99 (q, J= 7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.14 (s, 3H), 1.25 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H).

68 Method of 2-[3-(4-Acetyl-3- LC-MS (m/e): 427 (M-Preparation hydroxy-2- xo 1); 'H NMR (CDC13) b CF i N
44 trifluoromethyl- 13.65 (1 H, s), 8.36 (1 phenoxymethyl)- H, d), 7.89 (1 H, d), phenoxy] - 7. 5 0(1 H, dd), 7.10 -isonicotinonitrile 7.40 (5 H, m), 6.59 (d, 1H), 5.30 (2 H, s), 2.62 (3 H, s).
69 Method of 6-[3-(4-Acetyl-3- LC-MS (m/e): 427 (M-Preparation hydroxy-2- xo ~~3 0 ~ ~ 1); 'H NMR (CDC13) 8 i 44 trifluoromethyl- cF 13.70 (1H, s), 8.54 (1 H, phenoxymethyl)- dd), 8.02 (1H, dd), 7.94 phenoxy]- (1 H, d), 7.56 (1 H, dd), nicotinonitrile 7.41 (1 H, d), 7.32 (1 H, s), 7.21 (1 H, d), 7.15 (1 H, d), 6.55 (1 H, d), 5.3 5(2H, s), 2.69 (3 H, s).

Prep.
Method Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
70 Method of 6-[3-(4-Acetyl-3- q LC-MS (m/e): 460 (M-Preparation hydroxy-2- xo o ~
~ ~N~0, 1) Cr3 / 4 4 trifluoromethyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenoxy]-nicotinic acid methyl ester 71 Method of 3-[2-(4-Acetyl-3- 0 MS (mlz): 416 (M-1).
Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- i OH
42 phenoxymethyl)-phenylsulfanyl]- S
benzonitrile 72 Method of 4-[3-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (m/z): 416 (M-1).
Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- xo O - S ~=N
42 phenoxymethyl)- C~
phenylsulfanyl]-benzonitrile 73 Method of 4-[2-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (m/z): 416 (M-1).
Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- O Q
42 phenoxymethyl)- I~ S~ ~
O OH
phenylsulfanyl]- ~N
benzonitrile 74 Method of 2-[4-(4-Acetyl-3- N MS (m/z): 416 (M-1).
Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- ~ s ~
42 phenoxymethyl)- HO ~ I I~
phenylsulfanyl]- 0 benzonitrile Prep.
Method Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
75 Method of 2-[3-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (m/z): 416 (M-1).
Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- 0 I OH N
42 phenoxymethyl)- o \ I S I%
phenylsulfanyl]-benzonitrile 76 Method of 4-[4-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (m/z): 416 (M-1).

Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)- HO 0\ I

s phenylsulfanyl]-benzonitrile 77 Method of 3-[4-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (m/z): 416 (M-1).

Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl-42 phenoxymethyl)- xo o\ I ~ I
S --N
phenylsulfanyl]-benzonitrile 78 Method of 2-[3-(4-Acetyl-3- /\ MS (m/z): 448 (M-1).
Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- o - \ /
HO
42 phenoxymethyl)- o;S' benzenesulfonyl]- N benzonitrile 79 Method of 3-[3-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (m/z): 448 (M-1).
/5 \=N
Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl-0:0 42 phenoxymethyl)- o xo _ ~~
benzenesulfonyl]- o benzonitrile Prep.
Method Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
80 Method of 4-[4-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (m/z): 448 (M-1).
Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl-HO O
42 phenoxymethyl)-benzenesulfonyl]- rr benzonitrile 81 Method of 3-[4-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (m/z): 448 (M-1).
Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- N
42 phenoxymethyl)- HOO \ o ~ ~ S
benzenesulfonyl]-benzonitrile 82 Method of 4-[3-(4-Acetyl-3- /\ o _ MS (m/z): 448 (M-1).
Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- HO D 42 phenoxymethyl)- O's:0 benzenesulfonyl]-I
\\
benzonitrile N
83 Method of 3-[2-(4-Acetyl-3- 0 MS (m/z): 432 (M-1).
Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- ~ OH
I
42 phenoxymethyl)- o benzenesulfinyl]- ~ N
~I
benzonitrile 84 Method of 2-[3-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (m/z): 432 (M-1).
Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- O S:O
~
42 phenoxymethyl)- ~~ ~
O OH
benzenesulfinyl]-benzonitrile Prep.
Method Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
85 Method of 4-[4-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (m/z): 432 (M-1).

Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- N
42 phenoxymethyl)- Ho O
s benzenesulfinyl]-benzonitrile 86 Metliod of 3-[4-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (m/z): 432 (M-1).

Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl-42 phenoxymethyl)- HO oaS:D,,~
benzenesulfinyl]-benzonitrile 87 Method of 3-[3-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (m/z): 432 (M-1).
Pre aration h drox -2- ro 1- ~N
o p Y Y p pY HO Q.
42 phenoxymethyl)- \ o ~\
benzenesulfinyl]-benzonitrile 88 Method of 3-[3-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (mlz): 495 (M-1).
Preparation liydroxy-2-propyl-42 phenoxymethyl)-benzenesulfonyl]- o 0 benzoic acid ethyl ester 89 Method of 3-[4-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (m/z): 495 (M-1).
Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl-42 phenoxymethyl)- HO o .o 0 benzenesulfonyl]- os ~ ~ o'~
.
benzoic acid ethyl ester Prep.
Method Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
90 Method of 4-[4-(4-Acetyl-3- MS (m/z): 481 (M-1).
Preparation hydroxy-2-propyl- xo ~ 1 o 42 phenoxymethyl)-benzenesulfonyl]- ~ I o 6s I ~
o benzoic acid 'o methyl ester Preparation 91 Synthesis of 3-(4-cyano-pyridin-2-ylsulfanyl)-benzoic acid.
Add sodium hydride (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 635 mg, 15.88 mmol) to a .5 solution of 3-mercapto-benzoic acid (1.11 g, 7.22 mmol) in dimethylformamide (50 mL) chilled to 0 C and stir. After 10 minutes add 2-chloro-isonicotinonitrile (1.00 g, 7.22 mmol). Wann gradually to ambient temperature. After 18 hours, add 1N aqueous hydrochloric acid (200 mL). Filter the resulting precipitate, washing with water and hexanes to yield the title compound as a tan solid (920 mg, 50%): 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 7.62-7.66 (m, 3H), 7.84 (d, 1H), 8.03-8.08 (m, 2H), 8.62 (d, 1H), 13.26 (bs, 1H).
Preparation 92 Synthesis of 3-(5-cyano-pyridin-2-ylsulfanyl)-benzoic acid.
Add sodium hydride (60% dispersion in mineral oil, 635 mg, 15.88 mmol) to a solution of 3-mercapto-benzoic acid (1.11 g, 7.22 mmol) in dimethylformamide (50 mL) chilled to 0 C and stir. After 10 minutes add 6-chloro-nicotinonitrile (1.00 g, 7.22 mmol). Warm gradually to ambient temperature. After 18 hours, add 1N aqueous hydrochloric acid (200 mL). Filter resulting precipitate, washing with water and hexanes to yield the title compound as a tan solid (1.25 g, 68%): 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) S
7.22 (d, 1H), 7.67 (t, 1H), 7.88 (dt, 1H), 8.07-8.12 (m, 3H), 8.82 (dd, 1H), 13.30 (bs, 1H).
Preparation 93 Synthesis of 2-(3-hydroxymethyl-phenylsulfanyl)-nicotinonitrile.
Dissolve 3-(3-cyano-pyridin-2-ylsulfanyl)-benzoic acid (1.50 g, 5.85 mmol) in thionyl chloride (50 mL) and stir. Heat to reflux. After 2 hours, concentrate under reduced pressure to give a residue. Dissolve residue in dioxane (100 mL) and add sodium borohydride (2.21 g, 58.5 mmol). Heat to 50 C. After 2 hours, cool to ambient temperature and add water. Extract with ethyl acetate, combine organic layers, dry with sodium sulfate, filter and concentrate to give the title compound as a yellow oil (1.20 g, 85%): 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 6 4.54 (d, 2H), 5.30 (t, 1H), 7.37 (dd, 1H), 7.43 (in, 3H), 7.50 (m, 1H), 8.29 (dd, 1H), 8.56 (dd, 1H).
Preparation 94 Synthesis of 2-(3-hydroxymethyl-phenylsulfanyl)-isonicotinonitrile.
Dissolve 3-(4-cyano-pyridin-2-ylsulfanyl)-benzoic acid (920 mg, 3.59 mmol) in thionyl chloride (50 mL) and stir. Heat to reflux. After 2 hours, concentrate under reduced pressure to give a residue. Dissolve residue in dioxane (100 mL) and add sodium borohydride (1.36 g, 35.9 mmol). Heat to 50 C. After 2 hours, cool to ambient temperature and add water. Extract with ethyl acetate, combine organic layers, dry with sodium sulfate, filter and concentrate to give the title compound as a yellow oil (378 mg, 44%): 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) S 4.56 (d, 2H), 5.31 (t, 1H), 7.38 (m, 1H), 7.48 (m, 3H), 7.55 (m, 1 H), 7.59 (dd, 1 H), 8.62 (dd, 1 H).
Preparation 95 Synthesis of 6-(3-hydroxymethyl-phenylsulfanyl)-nicotinonitrile.
Dissolve 3-(5-cyano-pyridin-2-ylsulfanyl)-benzoic acid (1.25 g, 4.88 mmol) in thionyl chloride (50 mL) and stir. Heat to reflux. After 2 hours, concentrate under reduced pressure to give a residue. Dissolve residue in dioxane (100 mL) and add sodium borohydride (1.85 g, 48.8 mmol). Heat to 50 C. After 2 hours, cool to ambient temperature and add water. Extract with ethyl acetate, combine organic layers, dry with sodium sulfate, filter and concentrate to give the title compound as a yellow oil (670 mg, 57%): 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) S 4.56 (d, 2H), 5.33 (t, 1H), 7.06 (d, 1H), 7.49 (m, 3H), 7.57 (m, 1H), 8.08 (dd, 1H), 8.82(dd, 1H).

Preparation 96 Synthesis of 2-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylsulfanyl]-nicotinonitrile.
The title compound is prepared essentially as described in Preparation 42 employing 2-(3-hydroxymethyl-phenylsulfanyl)-nicotinonitrile (920 mg, 3.79 mmol).
The title compound is isolated as a white solid (1.50 g, 94%): 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 0.81 (t, 3H), 1.45 (sextet, 2H), 2.56 (t, 2H), 2.58 (s, 3H), 5.30 (s, 2H), 6.72 (d, 1H), 7.38 (dd, 1 H), 7.54 (m, 3H), 7.64 (m, 114), 7.82 (d, 1 H), 8.30 (dd, 1 H), 8.55 (dd, 1H), 12.84 (s, 1H).

Preparation 97 Synthesis of 2-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylsulfanyl]-isonicotinonitrile.
The title compound is prepared essentially as described in Preparation 42 employing 2-(3-hydroxymethyl-phenylsulfanyl)-isonicotinonitrile (378 mg, 1.56 mmol).
The title compound is isolated as a white solid (380 mg, 58%): 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 0.80 (t, 3H), 1.44 (sextet, 2H), 2.57 (m, 5H), 5.32 (s, 2H), 6.72 (d, 1H), 7.41 (s, 1H), 7.56-7.63 (m, 4H), 7.68 (s, 1 H), 7.82 (d, 1 H), 8.63 (d, 1 H), 12.84 (s, 1H).

Preparation 98 Synthesis of 6-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylsulfanyl]-nicotinonitrile.

The title compound is prepared essentially as described in Preparation 42 employing 6-(3-hydroxymethyl-phenylsulfanyl)-nicotinonitrile (650 mg, 2.68 mmol).
The title compound is isolated as a white solid (430 mg, 38%): 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 0.81 (t, 3H), 1.44 (sextet, 2H), 2.57 (d, 2H), 2.58 (s, 3H), 5.33 (s, 2H), 6.73 (d, 1H), 7.10 (d, 1 H), 7.60 (m, 3H), 7.70 (m, 1 H), 7.82 (d, 1 H), 8.08 (dd, 1H), 8.81 (dd, 1 H), 12.84 (bs, 1 H).

Preparation 99 Synthesis of 3-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxyrnethyl)-phenylsulfanyl]-benzonitrile.
Add methanesulfonyl chloride (0.119 g, 1.04 mmol) to a solution of 3-(3-hydroxymethyl-phenylsulfanyl)-benzonitrile (0.250 g, 1.04 mmol) and triethylamine (0.210 g, 2.07 mmol) in dichloromethane (0.2111). Stir for lh. Evaporate solvent.
Dissolve the residue in N,N-dimethylformamide and add 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-propyl-phenyl)-ethanone (0.201 g, 1.04 mmol). Add cesium carbonate (0.673 g, 2.07 mmol) and stir for lh at 60 C. Dilute the reaction mixture with diethyl ether and wash with water (3x). Purify the residue by flash chromatography, eluting with hexanes, ramping to 50%
ethyl acetate/hexanes to elute the title compound (0.331 mg, 0.790 mmol, 76%):
MS
(m/z): 416 (M-1).
Example 1 Synthesis of 1-(4-acetyl-2-hydroxy-3-propyl-4-{4-[3-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-pyridin-2-yloxy]-benzyloxy}-phenyl)-ethanone.

O I
HO O I~ N' I
~ O ~
HN ~N
N=N
Mix 2-[4-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenoxy]-nicotinonitrile (0.16 g, 0.40 mmol), triethylamine hydrochloride (1.11 g, 8.05 mmol), sodium azide (0.52 g, 8.05 mmol) and toluene (6 mL) in a pressure vessel. Seal and heat to 130 C
for 6 hrs.

Concentrate under reduced pressure to give a residue. Dilute with ethyl acetate (25 mL) and wash with 1N hydrochloric acid (3 x 50 mL). Dry over magnesium sulfate, filter, and concentrate to give a residue. Purification by flash chromatography, using 40:1 Chydrochloric acid3/methanol + 1% acetic acid to 20:1 chloroformchloroform/methanol +
1% acetic acid as a gradient eluent gives the title compound (0.07 g, 40%): MS
(m/z):
444.1 (M-1). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 12.88 (s, 1H), 8.57 (d, J= 7.4 Hz, 1H), 8.32 (d, J =
5.0 Hz, 1H), 7.84 (d, J = 9.2 Hz, 1H),7.54(d,J=8.2Hz,2H),7.38(dd,J=5.0Hz,7.4 Hz, 1H), 7.29 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, 2H), 6.79 (d, J = 9.2 Hz, 1H), 5.31 (s, 2H), 2.62 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.60 (s, 3H), 1.57-1.47 (m, 2H), 0.90 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 3H).

Example 2 Synthesis of 1-(2-hydroxy-3-propyl-4-{3-[3-(2H-tetrazol-5-yl)-pyridin-2-ylsulfanyl]-benzyloxy} -phenyl)-ethanone.
H

N,N

HO O S/
N
Using the procedure estentially as described for Example 1 using 2-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylsulfanyl]-nicotinonitrile (350 mg, 0.836 mmol), sodium azide (544 mg, 8.36 mmol), and triethylamine hydrochloride (1.15 g, 8.36 mmol) to yield the title compound as a tan solid (185 mg, 48%): 'H NMR (DMSO-d6) 6 0.796 (t, 3H), 1.45 (sextuplet, 2H), 2.56 (t, 2H), 2.58 (s, 3H), 5.29 (s, 2H), 6.73 (d, 1H), 7.3 8(dd, 111), 7.4 8(m, 311), 7.5 7(s, 111), 7.82 (d, 1 H), 8.16 (d, 111), 8.44 (dd, 1H), 12.84 (s, 1H); MS (esi negative) inlz 460 (m-1).
Example 3 Synthesis of 1-(2-hydroxy-3-propyl-4-{3-[5-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-pyridin-2-yloxy]-benzyloxy} -phenyl)-ethanone.

O
Hol~o o N.
l , NN
H'N
Mix 6-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenoxy]-nicotinonitrile of Preparation 42, (0.33 g, 0.83 mmol), isopropyl alcohol (5 mL), zinc bromide (1.12 g, 4.98 nimol), sodium azide (0.32 g, 4.98 mmol) and water (5 mL) in a pressure flask. Seal the flask and heat to 130 C in an oil bath for 6 hr. Allow to cool to ambient temperature and pour into 1N hydrochloric acid (50 mL). Filter the white solid and purify by flash chromatography, using 40:1 chloroformchloroform/methanol + 1% acetic acid to 20:1 chloroformchloroform/methanol + 1% acetic acid as a gradient eluent to give the title compound (0.25 g, 68%): MS (m/z): 444.2 (M-1). 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 12.86 (s, 1H), 8.80 (s, 1 H), 8.46 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 111), 7.84 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 1 H), 7.52 (t, J= 8.2 Hz, 111), 7.37-7.28 (m, 3H), 7.20 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 1H), 6.75 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 1H), 5.32 (s, 2H), 2.63-2.55 (m, 5H), 1.51-1.41 (m, 2H), 0.82 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 3H).
The following compounds are prepared essentially as described in Example 1, 2 or Example 3 as designated in the table below.

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 4 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- MS (m/z): 443.2 (M-o Example 3 3-propyl-4-{4- Ho ) o C ~ ~ 1). 'H NMR (DMSO-[2-(1H-tetrazol- o~ d6) 12.87 (s, 1H), 8.11 HN ~N
5-yl)-phenoxy]- N N (d, J = 7.7 Hz, 1H), benzyloxy}- 7.84 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, phenyl)- 1 H), 7.58 (t, J 7.7 Hz, ethanone 1 H), 7.51 (d, J 8.2 Hz, 2H), 7.36 (t, J 7.5 Hz, 1H), 7.15 (d, J
8.0 Hz, 2H), 7.01 (d, J
= 8.2 Hz, 1 H), 6.77 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 5.26 (s, 2H), 2.63-2.57 (m, 5H), 1.54-1.45 (m, 2H), 0.88 (t, J= 7.6 Hz, 3H).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- o N-Nõ MS (m/z): 444.2 (M-Example 3 3-propyl-4-{4- xo ) o ~-~ ~ 1). 'H NMR (DMSO-[5-(1H-tetrazol- ~ o' ~~ N d6) 12.88 (s, 1H), 8.80 5-yl)-pyridin-2- (s, 1 H), 8.45 (d, J= 8.7 yloxy]- Hz, 1H), 7.85 (d, J=
benzyloxy}- 9.1 Hz, 1H), 7.55 (d, J
phenyl)- = 8.7 Hz, 2H), 7.31(d, J
ethanone = 8.6 Hz, 111), 7.27 (d, J= 8.6 Hz, 2H), 6.80 (d, J= 9.1 Hz, 111), 5.31 (s, 2H), 2.63 (t, J =
7.3 Hz, 2H), 2.61 (s, 3H), 1.57-1.47 (m, 2H), 0.91 (t, J = 7.3 Hz, 3H).
6 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- N~ ~ MS (m/z): 444.2 (M-Example 3 3-propyl-4-{3- Hp o ~~ o j ~ 1). 1H NMR (DMSO-i [3-(1H-tetrazol- d6) 12.86 (s, 1H), 8.57 5-yl)-pyridin-2- (d, J = 7.0 Hz, 1 H), yloxy]- 8.33 (d, J = 4.4 Hz, benzyloxy}- 1H), 7.83 (d, J = 8.8 phenyl)- Hz, 1H), 7.52 (t, J= 7.0 ethanone Hz, 1H), 7.41-7.22 (m, 4H), 6.75 (d, J = 8.8 Hz, 1H), 5.31 (s, 2H), 2.61-2.55 (m, 5H), 1.51-1.41 (m, 2H), 0.81 (t, J = 7.3 Hz, 3H).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 7 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- N~ ~ MS (m/z): 443.2 (M-o Example 3 3-propyl-4-{3- Ho ) o ~= o~ ~ 1). 1H NMR (DMSO-[2-(1H-tetrazol- ~ \ d6) 12.87 (s, 1H), 8.12 5-yl)-phenoxy]- (d, J= 7.7 Hz, 1H), benzyloxy}- 7.81 (d, J= 9.2 Hz, phenyl)- 1 H), 7.5 7 (t, J= 7.7 Hz, ethanone 1H), 7.49 (t, J= 7.7 Hz, 1H), 7.37 (t, J = 7.7 Hz, 1H), 7.29 (d, J = 7.7 Hz, 1 H), 7.20-7.11 (m, 2H), 7.01 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 111), 6.71 (d, J =
9.2 Hz, 1 H), 5.27 (s, 2H), 2.59 (s, 3H), 2.54 (t, J = 7.9 Hz, 2H), 1.47-1.37 (m, 2H), 0.79 (t,J=7.5Hz,3H).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 8 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- MS (m/z): 430.2 (M-O
Example 3 3-methyl-4-{3- Ho oorsi' 1). 'H NMR (DMSO-~ i N. I H
[4-(1H-tetrazol- d6) 12.92 (s, 1H), 8.41 5-yl)-pyridin-2- (d, J = 5.0 Hz, 1H), yloxy]- 7.86 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, benzyloxy}- 1H), 7.76 (d, J = 5.0 phenyl)-propan- Hz, 1 H), 7.62 (s, 1 H), 1-one 7.51 (t, J 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.37(d,J=7.7Hz, 1H), 7.31 (s, 1H), 7.20 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 1H), 6.74 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 111), 5.31 (s, 2H), 3.06 (q, J = 7.3 Hz, 2H), 2.05 (s, 3H), 1.11 (t, J =
7.3 Hz, 3H).
9 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- o MS (m/z): 444.2 (M-Example 3 3-propyl-4-{4- Ho ) o () o N 1). 'H NMR (DMSO-[4-(1H-tetrazol- ~-rr d6) 12.88 (s, 1H), 8.39 5-yl)-pyridin-2- (s, 1H), 7.85 (d, J = 9.0 yloxy]- Hz, 1H), 7.76 (bs, 1H), benzyloxy}- 7.62 (bs, 1H), 7.54 (d, J
phenyl)- = 8.2 Hz, 2H), 7.27 (d, ethanone J= 8.2 Hz, 2H), 6.79 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 5.31 (s, 2H), 2.62 (t, J =
7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.60 (s, 3H), 1.58-1.47 (m, 2H), 0.90 (t, J = 7.5 Hz, 3H).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- MS (m/z): 444.1 (M-o Example 1 3-propyl-4-{4- HO X 1). 1H NMR (DMSO-[3-(1H-tetrazol- d6) 12.88 (s, 1H), 8.57 HN~N
5-yl)-pyridin-2- N N (d, J= 7.4 Hz, 1H), yloxy]- 8.32 (d, J= 5.0 Hz, benzyloxy)- 1H), 7.84 (d, J = 9.2 phenyl)- Hz, 1H), 7.54 (d, J =
ethanone 8.2 Hz, 2H), 7.3 8 (dd, J
= 5.0 Hz, 7.4 Hz, 1 H), 7.29 (d, J = 8.2 Hz, 2H), 6.79 (d, J = 9.2 Hz, 1 H), 5.31 (s, 2H), 2.62 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.60 (s, 3H), 1.57-1.47 (m, 2H), 0.90 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 3H).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 11 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- N_Ii MS (m/z): 444.2 (M-Example 1 3-propyl-4-{3- HO i~ N i~ 1). 1H NMR (DMSO-[4-(1H-tetrazol- d6) 12.86 (s, 1H), 8.41 5-yl)-pyridin-2- (d, J = 5.1 Hz, 1H), yloxy]- 7.83 (d, J = 8.9 Hz, benzyloxy}- 1H), 7.77 (d, J= 5.1 phenyl)- Hz, 1H), 7.62 (s, 1H), ethanone 7.51 (t, J 7.9 Hz, 1H), 7.35(d,J7.6Hz, 1H), 7.29 (s, 114), 7.20 (d, J = 7.9 Hz, 1 H), 6.74 (d, J = 8.9 Hz, 1H), 5.31 (s, 2H), 2.59 (s, 3H), 2.57 (t, J = 7.4 Hz, 2H), 1.50-1.40 (m, 2H), 0.81 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3H).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 12 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- MS (m/z): 429.1 (M-Example 1 3-methyl-4-{3- Ho 1). 'H NMR (DMSO-I~
[4-(1H-tetrazol- H- d6) 12.91 (s, 1H), 8.07 5-yl)-phenoxy]- (d, J = 8.5 Hz, 2H), benzyloxy}- 7.85 (d, J = 9.2 Hz, phenyl)-propan- 1H), 7.50 (d, J= 8.2 1-one Hz, 1H), 7.33 (d, J =
7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.23 (d, J
= 8.5 Hz, 2H), 7.21 (s, 1 H), 7.11 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 1H), 6.72 (d, J =
9.2 Hz, 1 H), 5.3 0 (s, 2H), 3.06 (q, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.03 (s, 3H), 1.11 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 3H).

Ex. # Method Chemical name Structure Physical data 13 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- MS (m/z): 443.2 (M-Example 1 3-propyl-4-{3- HO ) i~ ~ i ~ 1). 'H NMR (DMSO-[4-(1H-tetrazol- H'N d6) 12.85 (s, 1H), 8.07 5-yl)-phenoxy]- (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 2H), benzyloxy}- 7.83 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, phenyl)- 1H), 7.51 (t, J 7.6 Hz, ethanone 1 H), 7.3 0 (d, J 7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.24 (d, J=
8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.18 (s, 1 H), 7.13 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 1 H), 6.72 (d, J=
9.1 Hz, 1H), 5.30 (s, 2H), 2.59 (s, 3H), 2.55 (t, J = 7.7 Hz, 2H), 1.47-1.38 (m, 2H), 0.79 (t, J = 7.7 Hz, 3H).

14 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- MS (m/z): 497.1 (M-Example 1 3-methyl-4-{3- HO ~. . H 1). 'H NMR (DMSO-[3-(1H-tetrazol- ~ CF3 d6) 12.89 (s, 1H), 8.14 5-yl)-5- (s, 1H), 7.91 (s, 1H), trifluoromethyl- 7.83 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, phenoxy]- 1H), 7.63 (s, 1H), 7.55 benzyloxy}- (t, J 7.9 Hz, 1H), 7.38 phenyl)-propan- (d, J 7.6 Hz, 1H), 1-one 7.28 (s, 1 H), 7.21 (d, J
= 7.9 Hz, 1 H), 6.72 (d, J= 9.1 Hz, 1 H), 5.31 (s, 2H), 3.05 (q, J = 7.1 Hz, 2H), 1.99 (s, 3H), 1.11 (t, J= 7.1 Hz, 3H).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 15 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- MS (m/z): 429.1 (M-Example 1 3-methyl-4-{4- Ho (~ o ~~ ~ ~ 1). 'H NMR (DMSO-[3-(1H-tetrazol- ~ o\ H-~' d6) 12.93 (s, 1H), 7.87 5-yl)-phenoxy]- (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), benzyloxy}- 7.84 (d, J= 7.9 Hz, phenyl)-propan- 1H), 7.69-7.63 (m, 2H), 1-one 7.56 (d, J= 8.6 Hz, 2H), 7.28 (dd, J = 2.2 Hz, 8.1 Hz, 1 H), 7.17 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H), 6.77 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 5.28 (s, 2H), 3.07 (q, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.07 (s, 3H), 1.12 (t, J =
7.2 Hz, 3H).
16 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- MS (m/z): 430.1 (M-Example 1 3-methyl-4-{3- 1). 1H NMR (DMSO-Example ~
[5-(1H-tetrazol- N, d6) 12.92 (s, 1H), 8.80 H
5-yl)-pyridin-2- (s, 1H), 8.45 (dd, J= 2.2 yloxy]- Hz, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.86 benzyloxy}- (d, J= 8.9 Hz, 1H), phenyl)-propan- 7.52 (t, J 8.0 Hz, 1H), 1-one 7.3 8 (d, J= 7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.33-7.29 (m, 2H), 7.20 (d, J = 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 6.75 (d, J= 8.9 Hz, 1H), 5.32 (s, 2H), 3.07 (q, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.06 (s, 3H), 1.11 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 3H).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 17 Method of 1-(3-Fluoro-2- MS (m/z): 419.9 (M-Example 1 hydroxy-4-{3- Ho ~ F o (~ o N 1). 'H NMR (DMSO-[5-(1H-tetrazol- H'~ d6) 12.36 (s, 1H), 8.80 5-yl)-pyridin-2- (s, 1H), 8.46 (d, J= 8.8 yloxy]- Hz, 1H), 7.77 (d, J=
benzyloxy)- 9.1 Hz, 1H), 7.52 (t, J
phenyl)- 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.39 (d, J
ethanone = 7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.34-7.29 (m, 2H), 7.23 (d, J
=8.OHz,1H),6.92(t,J
= 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 5.3 7(s, 2H), 2.62 (s, 3H).
18 Method of 1-(3-Chloro-2- o MS (m/z): 435.9 (M-Example 1 hydroxy-4-{3- Ho j cl o (~ oT N ), 1). 1H NMR (DMSO-[5-(1H-tetrazol- H'~ d6) 13.16 (s, 1H), 8.80 5-yl)-pyridin-2- (s, 1H), 8.46 (d, J = 8.5 yloxy]- Hz, 1H), 7.98 (d, J=
benzyloxy}- 9.2 Hz, 1H), 7.53 (t, J
phenyl)- 7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.39 (d, J
ethanone = 7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.34-7.30 (m, 2H), 7.22 (d, J
= 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 6.93 (t, J
= 9.2 Hz, 1 H), 5.42 (s, 2H), 2.65 (s, 3H).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 19 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- o MS (m/z): 416.0 (M-Example 1 3-methyl-4-{3- ~' 1). 'H NMR (DMSO-[5-(1H-tetrazol- H N d6) 12.87 (s, 1H), 8.80 5-yl)-pyridin-2- (s, 1H), 8.46 (d, J = 8.6 yloxy]- Hz, 1H), 7.84 (d, J =
benzyloxy}- 9.1 Hz, 1H), 7.52 (t, J
phenyl)- 7.9 Hz, 1H), 7.38 (d, J
ethanone = 7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.33-7.16 (m, 3H), 6.76 (t, J
= 9.1 Hz, 1H), 5.32 (s, 2H), 2.60 (s, 3H), 2.06 (s, 3H).
20 Method of 1-(3-Chloro-2- o N N MS (m/z): 435.9 (M-Example 1 hydroxy-4-{3- Hc I ci cC N H' 1). 1H NMR (DMSO-[4-(1H-tetrazol- d6) 13.16 (s, 1H), 8.40 5-yl)-pyridin-2- (d, J= 5.1 Hz, 1H), yloxy]- 7.97 (d, J = 9.2 Hz, benzyloxy}- 1H), 7.77 (d, J= 5.1 phenyl)- Hz, 1 H), 7.62 (s, 1H), ethanone 7.52 (t, J 8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.3 8 (d, J 7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.33 (s, 1H), 7.21 (d, J = 8.1 Hz, 111), 6.93 (d, J = 9.2 Hz, 1H), 5.42 (s, 2H), 2.65 (s, 3H).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 21 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- o~
\ MS (m/z): 416.0 (M-o Example 1 3-methyl-4-{4- xo ~ o \ 1). 1H NMR (DMSO-[4-(1H-tetrazol- H'N d6) 12.88 (s, 1H), 8.39 5-yl)-pyridin-2- (d, J = 5.0 Hz, 1H), yloxy]- 7.86, J = 9.0 Hz, 1H), benzyloxy}- 7.75 (d, J= 5.0 Hz, phenyl)- 1H), 7.62 (s, 111), 7.56 ethanone (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H), 7.26 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H), 6.80 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 5.31 (s, 2H), 2.61 (s, 3H), 2.08 (s, 3H).
22 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- MS (m/z): 416.0 (M-oj, Example 1 3-methyl-4-{4- Ho J/ o Co 1). 1H NMR (DMSO-[3-(1H-tetrazol- H'N d6) 12.88 (s, 1H), 8.39 5-yl)-phenoxy]- (d, J = 5.0 Hz, 1H), benzyloxy}- 7.86, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), phenyl)- 7.75 (d, J= 5.0 Hz, ethanone 111), 7.62 (s, 1 H), 7.56 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H), 7.26 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H), 6.80 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 5.31 (s, 2H), 2.61 (s, 3H), 2.08 (s, 311).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 23 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- o 'H NMR (DMSO-d6) Example 3 4-{4-[3-(1H- HO 12.87 (s, 1H), 7.84 (d, J
N
tetrazol-5-yl)- H N = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 7.70-phenoxy]- 7.61 (m, 2H), 7.56 (d, J
benzyloxy}- = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 7.27 (d, phenyl)- J = 8.1 Hz, 1H), 7.17 ethanone (d, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 6.78 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 1H), 5.28 (s, 2H), 2.60 (s, 3H), 2.06 (s, 3H).
24 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- 0 'H NMR (DMSO-d6) Example 3 3-propyl-4-{6- Ho):O ~ N o~ ,~, 12.64 (s, 1H), 7.79 (d, J
[3-(1H-tetrazol- H N = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.71 (bs, 5-yl)-phenoxy]- 1H), 7.63 (dd, J= 2.0 pyridin-3- Hz, 8.5 Hz, 1H), 7.50-ylmethoxy}- 7.31 (m, 3H), 7.06 (d, J
phenyl)- = 7.2 Hz, 1H), 7.00 (d, ethanone J= 8.2 Hz, 2H), 6.47 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 6.42 (s, 1 H), 5.02 (s, 2H), 2.51 (s, 3H).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 25 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- H NMR (DMSO-d6) Example 3 3-methyl-4-{6- Ho ~o (; ~ ~ 12.86 (s, 1H), 8.29 (s, [3-(1H-tetrazol- N o\ H-~' 1H), 8.01 (dd, J = 2.2 5-yl)-phenoxy]- Hz, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.93 pyridin-3- (d, J= 8.0 Hz, 1H), ylmethoxy}- 7.85 (d, J= 9.1 Hz, phenyl)-propan- 1 H), 7.81 (s, 1 H), 7.69 1-one (t, J 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.41 (d, J 8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.23 (d,J=8.4Hz, 1H), 6.80 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, 111), 5.27 (s, 2H), 2.60 (s, 3H), 2.57 (t, J =
7.5 Hz, 2H), 1.51-1.43 (m, 2H), 0.86 (t, J = 8.5 Hz, 3H).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 26 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- N=N H NMR (DMSO-d6) ,~NH
Example 1 4-{4-[3-(2H- xo o C o() 12.92 (s, 1H), 8.31 (s, tetrazol-5-yl)- 1H), 8.04 (dd, J = 2.2 phenoxy]- Hz, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.93 benzyloxy}-3- (d, J= 7.6 Hz, 1H), trifluoromethyl- 7.89 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, phenyl)- 1H), 7.82 (s, 1 H), 7.69 ethanone (t, J 8.2 Hz, 1H), 7.42 (d, J 8.2 Hz, 1 H), 7.22 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H), 6.80 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, 1H), 5.26 (s, 2H), 3.07 (q, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.03 (s, 3H), 1.11 (t, J = 7.2 Hz, 2H).
27 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- ~ N N LC-MS (m/e): 469 (M-Example 1 4-{3-[4-(2H- HO ~~ ~~ ~~' ~ 1); 1H NMR (DMSO-CF3 N i tetrazol-5-yl)- d6) 8 13.81 (1 H, s), pyridin-2- 8.25 (1 H, d), 7.85 (1 yloxy]- H, d), 7.65 (2 H, m), benzyloxy}-3- 7.53 (2 H, d), 7.28 (1 trifluoromethyl- H, m), 7.18 (2 H, d), phenyl)- 6.98 (1 H, d), 5.40 (2 ethanone H, s), 2.67 (3 H, s) Ex. # Method # Cheinical name Structure Physical data 28 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- ~ LC-MS (m/e): 470 (M-~
Example 1 4-{3-[5-(2H- Ho~F o-_() ~N 1); 1H NMR (DMSO-3 tetrazol-5-yl)- NH d6) 8 13.80 (1 H, s), pyridin-2- 8.41 (1 H, d), 8.23 (1 yloxy]- H, d), 7.78 (1 H, dd), benzyloxy}-3- 7.62 (1 H, s), 7.51 (1 H, trifluoromethyl- dd), 7.35 (1 H, d), 7.29 phenyl)- (1 H, s), 7.21 (1 H, d), ethanone 6.94 (1 H, d), 5.44 (2 H, s), 2.65 (3 H, s).
29 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- o ox H LC-MS (m/e): 470 (M-Exam le s N N 1); 1H NMR (DMSO
3 3-propYl-4-{3- o ~ ~
P ~. r~
[3-(2H-tetrazol- ~ d6) S 13.53 (1 H, s), 5-yl)- 8.30 (1 H, d), 8.47 (1 phenylsulfanyl] H, dd), 8.23 (1 H, d), -benzyloxy}- 7.52 (1 H, dd), 7.15 -phenyl)- 7.44 (4 H, m), 6.95 ethanone (1H, d), 5.45 (2H, s), 2.65 (3H, s).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 30 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- 'H NMR (400 MHz, Example 3 3-propyl-4-{2- acetone-d6) 8 0.85 (t, J
[3-(2H-tetrazol- = 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.48 5-yl)- (sextuplet, J= 10.2 Hz, phenylsulfanyl] 0 2H), 2.57 (s, 3H), 2.60 -benzyloxy}- ~ ~ oH (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 2H), 5.29 ~
phenyl)- o x (s, 2H), 6.66 (d, J= 9.0 N-N
ethanone s Hz, 1H), 7.43-7.60 (m, 6H), 7.76 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 8.04 (d, J=
9.0 Hz, 1H), 8.11 (s, 1H), 12.87 (s, 1H). MS
(m/z): 459 (M-1).
31 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- 'H NMR (400 MHz, Example 3 3-propyl-4-{3- acetone-d6) 8 0.89 (t, J
[4-(1H-tetrazol- = 7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.53 (q, 5-yl)- J= 7.8 Hz, 2H), 2.54 phenylsulfanyl] (s, 3H), 2.63 (t, J= 7.6 -benzyloxy}- Hz, 2H), 5.38 (s, 2H), 0 _ phenyl)- HI s!~ N.N 6.61 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, x ethanone 1H), 7.44 (m, 2H), 7.49 (m, 1H), 7.5 8(in, 2H), 7.70 (m, 2H), 7.99 (d, J
= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 8.02 (s, 1H), 12.86 (s, 1H). MS
(m/z): 459 (M-1).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 32 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- 'H NMR (400 MHz, Example 3 3-propyl-4-{2- acetone-d6) b 0.85 (t, J
[4-(2H-tetrazol- = 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.47 (m, 5-yl)- 2H), 2.57 (s, 3H), 2.63 phenylsulfanyl] (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 2H), 5.30 -benzyloxy}- ~ I N-~ (s, 1H), 6.68 (d, J= 9.0 phenyl)- S~ Hz, 1H), 7.44-7.53 (m, ethanone HO O 5H), 7.62 (s, 1H), 7.77 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 8.07 (d, J = 9.0, 2H), 12.86 (s, 1H). MS
(APCI-NEG) m/z (rel intensity) 459 (100).
33 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- 'H NMR (400 MHz, Example 1 3-propyl-4-{4- acetone-d6) S 0.90 (t, J
[2-(2H-tetrazol- = 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.58-5-yl)- 1.49 (m, 2H), 2.56 (s, phenylsulfanyl] 3H), 2.64 (t, J= 7.6 Hz, -benzyloxy}- 2H), 5.38 (s, 2H), 6.61 phenyl)- (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), ethanone xo o ~ 7.39 (d, J= 8.6 Hz, I~ S \I
2H), 7.49 (t, J= 8.4 Hz, HN
N'N 1 H), 7.57 (t, J= 7.6 Hz, 15H), 7.62 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 11 H), 7.74 (d, J=
9.0 Hz, 2H), 8.06 (d, J
= 8.6 Hz, 2H), 12.86 (s, 1H). MS (m/z): 459 (M-1).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 34 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- 'H NMR (400 MHz, Example 1 3-propyl-4-{3- DMSO-d6) S 0.87 (t, J
[2-(2H-tetrazol- = 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.46-5-yl)- 1.50 (m, 2H), 2.51 (s, phenylsulfanyl] H 3H), 2.58 (in, 2H), 5.28 -benzyloxy}- o ox N, N (s, 2H), 6.73 (d, J= 9.0 phenyl)- s Hz, 1H), 7.18 (d, J=
ethanone 8.2 Hz, 1H), 7.37-7.44 (m, 2H), 7.47-7.51 (m, 4H), 7.82 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 2H), 12.85 (s, 1 H) .
MS (m/z): 459 (M-1).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 35 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- 'H NMR (400 MHz, Example 1 3-propyl-4-{4- DMSO-d6) b 0.79 (s, [4-(2H-tetrazol- 3H), 1.43 (q, J= 10.3 5-yl)- Hz, 2H), 2.50 (s, 3H), phenylsulfanyl] 2.57 (m, 2H), 5.25 (s, -benzyloxy}- 0 2H), 6.69 (d, J= 9.0 phenyl)- Ho o \ ~ ~~ N~'H Hz, 1H), 6.95 (m, 1H), s ethanone 7.23 (m, 2H), 7.34 (s, 1H), 7.42 (s, 2H), 7.48 (s, 1H), 7.73 (m, 1H), 7.78 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 12.83 (s, 1H). MS
(m/z): 459 (M-1).
36 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- 'H NMR (400 MHz, Example 1 3-propyl-4-{4- DMSO-d6) S 0.86 (t, J
[3-(2H-tetrazol- = 7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.48 (q, 5-yl)- J= 9.8 Hz, 2H), 2.57 phenylsulfanyl] (s, 3H), 2.58 (m, 2H), -benzyloxy}- 5.26 (s, 2H), 6.71 (d, J
phenyl)- xo oaS [) = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.37-~
ethanone N H 7.40 (m, 4H), 7.45 (d, J
= 8.2 Hz, 2H), 7.80 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.98 (d, J= 8.6 Hz, 2H), 12.84 (s, 1H). MS
(m/z): 459 (M-1).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 37 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- H NMR (400 MHz, Example 1 3-propyl-4-{3- DMSO-d6) S 0.90 (t, J
[2-(2H-tetrazol- = 7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.54 (q, 5-yl)- J= 10 Hz, 2H), 2.57 (s, benzenesulfonyl 2H), 2.57 (s, 3H), 2.64 O H
]-benzyloxy}- o H0_ J= 10 Hz, 5.26 S,O~N (q, > >
phenyl)- o" (s, 2H), 6.67 (m, 1H), ethanone 7.29-7.44 (m, 6H), 7.79 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 8.04 (m, 1H), 8.12 (s, 1H), 12.88 (s, 1H).
MS (m/z): 459 (M-1).
38 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- 'H NMR (400 MHz, Example 1 3-propyl-4-{3- DMSO-d6) b 0.86 (t, J
[3-(2H-tetrazol- = 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.47 (q, 5-yl)- J= 9.6 Hz, 2H), 2.50 benzenesulfonyl (s, 3H), 2.56 (m, 2H), ]-benzyloxy}- O ~% N~ 5.32 (s, 2H), 6.72 (d, J
phenyl)- \ ~~ = 9.4 Hz, 1H), 7.45 (m, ethanone 0 ox 1H), 7.58 (s, 1H), 7.65 (s, 1H), 7.71 (s, 2H), 7.79 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.87 (m, 2H), 8.21 (m, 1 H), 12.84 (s, 1H).
MS (m/z): 491 (M-1).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 39 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- 'H NMR (400 MHz, Example 1 3-propyl-4-{4- DMSO-d6) S 0.83 (t, J
[4-(2H-tetrazol- = 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.44 (m, 5-yl)- 2H), 2.55 (s, 3H), 2.57 benzenesulfonyl (m, 2H), 5.36 (s, 2H), ]-benzyloxy}- ~~ 6.69 (d, J= 9. 0 Hz, phenyl)- ~ ~ 1H), 7.65-7.70 (m, 2H), ethanone o s'o 7.74 (d, J= 7.4 Hz, 1 H), 7.18 (d, J= 9.4 xo ~~ Hz, 1 H), 7.90 (d, J
0 8.2 Hz, 1H), 7.96 (d, J
= 7.8 Hz, 1H), 8.08 (s, 1H), 8.27 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 1H), 8.50 (s, 1H), 12.84 (s, 1H). MS
(m/z): 491 (M-1).
40 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- 'H NMR (400 MHz, Example 1 3-propyl-4-{4- DMSO-d6) S 0.87 (t, J
[3-(2H-tetrazol- = 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.48 (m, 5-yl)- 2H), 2.50 (s, 3H), 2.60 benzenesulfonyl N.N (t, J= 7.6 Hz, 2H), 5.36 ]-benzyloxy}- ~
o,s (s, 2H), 6.65 (d, J= 9.0 phenyl)- /~ Hz, 1H), 7.67 (d, J=
ethanone HO r\ 8.6 Hz, 2H), 7.78 (d, J
- = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 8.03 (d, J= 6.6 Hz, 2H), 8.05 (d, J= 7.0 Hz, 2H), 8.22 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 2H), 12.84 (s, 2H). MS
(m/z): 491 (M-1).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 41 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- H NMR (400 MHz, Example 1 3-propyl-4-{3- DMSO-d6) S 0.87 (t, J
[4-(2H-tetrazol- = 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.48 (q, 5-yl)- J= 9.5 Hz, 2H), 2.50 benzenesulfonyl (s, 3H), 2.55 (m, 2H), ]-benzyloxy}- 5.36 (s, 2H), 6.65 (d, J
phenyl)- 0-a o = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.67 (d, ethanone Q os ~~ ,,' J= 7.8 Hz, 3H), 7.78 0 ox N-ri H (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.89 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 1 H), 8.04 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2H), 8.24 (d, J=
8.2 Hz, 1 H), 8.47 (s, 1H), 12.83 (s, 1H). MS
(m/z): 491 (M-1).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 42 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- 'H NMR (400 MHz, Example 2 3-propyl-4-{2- DMSO-d6) S 0.87 (t, J
[3-(1H-tetrazol- = 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.48 (m, 5-yl)- 2H), 2.56 (s, 3H), 2.59 benzenesulfinyl (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 2H), 5.36 ]-benzyloxy}- (s, 2H), 6.70 (d, J= 9.0 phenyl)- S 'N )q Hz, 1H), 7.68 (d, J=
ethanone p H' 7.8 Hz, 1 H), 7.74 (d, J
= 7.4 Hz, 1H), 7.80 (d, (OH J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.95 (d,J=7.8Hz, 1H), 7.98 (d, J= 8.6 Hz, 2H), 8.07 (s, 1H), 8.20 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 2H), 12.85 (s, 1H). MS
(m/z): 491 (M-1).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 43 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- 'H NMR (400 MHz, Example 2 3-propyl-4-{3- acetone-d6) S 0.86 (t, J
[2-(1H-tetrazol- = 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.45-5-yl)- 1.53 (m, 2H), 2.56 (s, benzenesulfinyl 3H), 2.63 (m, 2H), 5.43 ]-benzyloxy}- (d, J=12.5 Hz, 1H), phenyl)- o ox rr=rr 5.53 (d, J= 12.5 Hz, P,N
ethanone I~ \ s \ 1H), 6.62 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.65-7.72 (m, 3H), 7.76 (d, J = 8.6 Hz, 1H), 7.89 (d, J=
8.6 Hz, 2H), 8.01 (m, 1 H), 8.26 (d, J= 8.6 Hz, 2H), 12.86 (s, 3H).
MS (m/z): 475 (M-1).
44 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- 'H NMR (400 MHz, Example 2 3-propyl-4-{4- acetone-d6) S 0.88 (t, J
[4-(1H-tetrazol- = 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.51 (m, 5-yl)- 2H), 2.58 (s, 3H), 2.62 benzenesulfinyl (t, J= 7.6 Hz, 2H), 5.29 ]-benzyloxy}- o (s, 1H), 6.62 (d, J= 9.0 phenyl)- Ho o \ ~ ()~ Hz, 1 H), 7.50 (t, J= 7.6 ethanone o Hz, 1H), 7.5 5(d, J=
7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.75 (m, 3H), 7.84 (m, 1H), 7.89 (s, 1H), 8.05 (m, 1H), 8.26 (m, 1H), 12.88 (s, 1H). MS (m/z): 475 (M-1).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 45 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- 'H NMR (400 MHz, Example 2 3-propyl-4-{4- acetone-d6) 8 0.90 (t, J
[3-(1.H-tetrazol- = 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.54 (m, 5-yl)- 2H), 2.57 (s, 3H), 2.67 benzenesulfinyl (t, J= 7.6 Hz, 2H), 5.34 ]-benzyloxy}- o (s, 2H), 6.68 (d, J= 9.0 phenyl)- Hz, 1H), 7.69 (d, J=
HO ~ O ' I ~I ~
ethanone 8.6 Hz, 2H), 7.77 (d, J
O HDj = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.86 (d, J= 8.6 Hz, 2H), 7.98 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2H), 8.29 (d, J= 8.6 Hz, 2H), 12.88 (s, 1H).
MS (m/z): 475 (M-1).
46 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- 'H NMR (400 MHz, Example 2 3-propyl-4-{3- acetone-d6) 8 0.89 (t, J
[3-(2H-tetrazol- = 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.54 (m, 5-yl)- 2H), 2.57 (s, 3H), 2.67 benzenesulfinyl (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 2H), 5.33 ]-benzyloxy}- (s, 2H), 6.68 (d, J= 9.0 phenyl)- 0 OH Hz, 1H), 7.68 (d, J=
H
ethanone ~~ s N-N
7.8 Hz, 2H), 7.77 (d, J
= 8.2 Hz, 2H), 7.88 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2H), 7.94 (d, J= 8.6 Hz, 1 H), 8.25 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 1H), 8.50 (s, 1H), 12.88 (s, 1H). MS (m/z): 475 (M-1).

Ex. # Method # Chemical name Structure Physical data 47 Method of 1-(2-Hydroxy- 0 ox rr=rr 'H NMR (400 MHz, ~IN ,N
Example 2 3-propyl-4-{3- acetone-d6) 8 0.88 (t, J
[2-(1H-tetrazol- = 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.47-5-yl)- 1.57 (m, 2H), 2.57 (s, benzenesulfinyl 3H), 5.34 (s, 2H), 6.67 ]-benzyloxy}- (d, J= 9.0, 1H), 7.63 phenyl)- (m, 2H), 7.75 (m, 2H), ethanone 7.81 (d, J= 7.0, 1H), 7.90 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 1H), 7.94 (s, 1H), 8.24 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 1H), 8.49 (s, 1H), 12.87 (s, 1H). MS (m/z): 475 (M-1).

Example 48 Synthesis of 1-(2-hydroxy-3-propyl-4-{3-[4-(2H-tetrazol-5-yl)-pyridin-2-ylsulfanyl]-benzyloxy} -phenyl)-ethanone.
O
HO I O ~ S I N

-NN

Employing the procedure essentially as described in Example 1 using 6-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylsulfanyl]-nicotinonitrile (430 mg, 1.03 mmol), sodium azide (668 mg, 10.3 mmol), and triethylamine hydrochloride (1.41 g, 10.3 mmol) purify by reverse phase chromatography eluting with methanol: acetic acid:
water, the title compound is obtained as a white solid (77 mg, 16%): 'H NMR
(CD3CN) 8 0.83 (t, 3H), 1.48 (sextuplet, 2H), 2.53 (s, 3H), 2.60 (t, 2H), 5.24 (s, 2H), 6.62 (d, 1H), 7.11 (d, 1H), 7.56 (m, 3H), 7.71 (m, 2H), 8.11 (dd, 1H), 8.96 (dd, 1H), 12.82 (bs, 1H);
MS (esi negative) m/z 460 (m-1).

Example 49 Synthesis of 1-(2-hydroxy-3 -propyl-4- { 3 - [4-(2H-tetrazol-5-yl)-pyridin-2-ylsulfanyl] -benzyloxy}-phenyl)-ethanone.
O

I~ O I~ S N
HO

N-N
H
Employing the procedure essentially as described in Example 1 using 2-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylsulfanyl]-isonicotinonitrile (380 mg, 0.908 mmol), sodium azide (590 mg, 9.08 mmol), and triethylamine hydrochloride (1.25 g, 9.08 nimol), the title compound is obtained as a white solid (261 mg, 62%):
'H NMR
(DMSO-d6) 8 0.760 (t, 3H), 1.39 (sextuplet, 2H), 2.52 (t, 2H), 2.56 (s, 3H), 5.32 (s, 2H), 6.71 (d, 111), 7.59 (m, 4H), 7.73 (m, 2H), 7.79 (d, 1 H), 8.64 (d, 1H), 12.82 (s, 1 H); MS
(esi negative) m/z 460 (m-1).

Preparation 100 Synthesis of 2-iodo-benzene-1,3-diol.
Add sodium bicarbonate (27.9 g, 333 mmol) to a solution of benzene-1,3-diol (33.0 g, 300 mmol), and iodine (81.5 g, 321 mmol) in water (225 mL) chilled to 0 C and stir. Warm the solution to ambient temperature gradually over 1 hour. Extract with diethyl ether, combine organic layers, dry with sodium sulfate, filter and concentrate under reduced pressure to yield a white solid. Triturate the solid in chloroform (100 mL) chilled to -10 C. After 30 minutes, filter the precipitate, washing with cold chloroform to yield the title compound as a white solid (49.0 g, 69%): 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 6 6.33 (d, 2H), 6.93 (t, 1H), 10.03 (s, 2H).

Preparation 101 Synthesis of 1,3-bis-benzyloxy-2-iodo-benzene.
Add benzyl broinide (7.97 g, 46.6 mmol) to a solution of 2-iodo-benzene-1,3-diol (5.00 g, 21.2 mmol) and cesium carbonate (15.2 g, 46.6 mmol) in dimethylformamide (200 mL) and stir. After 18 hours, concentrate under reduced pressure. Add water (500 mL) and stir. After 1 hour, filter the resulting precipitate washing with water and hexanes to yield the title compound as an off-white solid (6.30 g, 71%): 1H NMR
(CDC13) S 5.18 (s, 4H), 6.55 (d, 2H), 7.19 (t, 1H), 7.29-7.53 (m, lOH).

Preparation 102 Synthesis of 1,3-bis-benzyloxy-2-trifluoromethyl-benzene.
Add difluoro-fluorosulfonyl-acetic acid methyl ester (15.0 g, 78.1 mmol) to a solution of 1,3-bis-benzyloxy-2-iodo-benzene (6.50 g, 15.6 mmol), hexamethylphosphoramide (13.99 g, 78.1 mmol), and copper iodide (3.57 g, 18.7 mmol) in dimethylformamide (50 mL) and stir. Heat reaction to 80 C. After 18 hours, cool to ambient temperature. Add saturated aqueous ammonium chloride (250 mL) and extract with ether. Combine organic layers, and wash with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate, brine, dry with magnesium sulfate, filter and concentrate under reduced pressure to give a residue. Purify the residue by flash chromatography eluting with 20%
ethyl acetate:hexanes to yield the title compound as a clear oil (4.60 g, 82%): 1H NMR

(CDC13) S 5.14 (s, 4H), 6.67 (d, 2H), 7.29-7.46 (m, 11H).

Preparation 103 Synthesis of 1,3-bis-benzyloxy-4-bromo-2-trifluoromethyl-benzene.
Add N-bromosuccinimide (4.67 g, 26.23 mmol) to a solution of 1,3-bis-benzyloxy-2-trifluoromethyl-benzene (9.40 g, 26.2 mmol) in dimethylformamide (100 mL) and stir. After 18 hours add water and extract with diethyl ether.
Combine organic layers, dry with sodium sulfate, filter and concentrate under reduced pressure to yield the title compound as an orange oil (11.20 g, 98%): 1H NMR (CD3CN) 8 4.97 (2, 2H), 5.18 (s, 2H), 6.99 (d, 1H), 7.33-7.55 (m, 10H), 7.79 (d, 1H).
Preparation 104 Synthesis of 1-(2,4-bis-benzyloxy-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-ethanone.
Add tetrakis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (2.93 g, 2.54 inmol) to a solution of 1,3-bis-benzyloxy-4-bromo-2-trifluoromethyl-benzene (11.10 g, 25.4 mmol) and tributyl-(1-ethoxy-vinyl)-stannane (10.08 g, 27.92 mmol) in dioxane (250 mL) and stir.
Purge reaction vessel with argon. Heat to 100 C. After 6 hours, cool to ambient temperature and concentrate under reduced pressure. Add 2N aqueous hydrochloric acid (50 mL), and tetrahydrofuran (200 mL) and stir. After 30 minutes add water and extract with ethyl acetate. Coinbine organic layers, dry with sodium sulfate, filter and concentrate under reduced pressure to yield a residue. Purify the residue by flash chromatography eluting with a gradient of 0-20% ethyl acetate:hexanes to yield the title compound as a clear oil (6.10 g, 60%): 1H NMR (CD3CN) S 2.48 (s, 3H), 4.89 (s, 2H), 5.25 (s, 2H), 7.08 (d, 1H), 7.33-7.48 (m, 10H), 7.83 (d, 1H).

Preparation 105 Synthesis of 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3 -trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-ethanone.
Add 20% palladium hydroxide on carbon (11.0 g, 15 mmol) to a solution of 1-(2,4-bis-benzyloxy-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-ethanone (6.00 g, 15 mmol) in ethanol (75 mL) and cyclohexene (75 mL) and stir. Purge the reaction vessel with argon.
Heat to reflux. After 18 hours, cool to ambient temperature, filter and concentrate under reduced pressure to yield the title compound as a grey solid (3.00 g, 91%): 1H NMR
(CD3CN) 5 2.55 (s, 3H), 6.51 (d, 1H), 7.88 (d, 1H), 13.91 (bs, 1H).

Example 50 Synthesis of 1-(2-hydroxy-3-propyl-4-{3-[3-(2H-tetrazol-5-yl)-benzenesulfinyl]-benzyloxy}-phenyl)-ethanone sodium salt (phenol).

O
~
Na.O O ~ ~ [, N
S ~ N
6 N-rJ
H
Add sodium hydride (12.1 mg, 0.504 mmol, 95%, dry, 1.00 mmol, Aldrich Chemical Co.) to a solution of 1-(2-hydroxy-3-propyl-4-{3-[3-(2H-tetrazol-5-yl)-benzenesulfinyl]-benzyloxy}-phenyl)-ethanone (0.240 g, 0.504 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (0.2 M. Evaporate solvent and triturate with diethyl ether. Filter to collect the title compound as the resulting precipitate (180 mg, 0.361 mmol, 72%): 'H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) S 0.84 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.33-1.39 (m, 2H), 2.45-2.47 (m, 2H), 2.50 (s, 3H), 5.07 (s, 2H), 5.77 (d, J= 9.4 Hz, 1H), 7.27 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.51-7.57 (m, 4H), 7.66 (d, J= 7.0 Hz, 1H), 7.82 (s, 1H), 8.07 (d, J= 7.0 Hz, 1H), 8.26 (s, 1H). MS
(m/z): 475 (M-1).

Example 51 Synthesis of 1-(2-hydroxy-3-propyl-4-{3-[3-(2Na-tetrazol-5-yl)-benzenesulfinyl]-benzyloxy}-phenyl)-ethanone sodium salt (tetrazole).

O
HO O S N
, Na Add sodium methoxide (1.00 mmol, 0.5 M solution in methanol) to a solution of 1-(2-hydroxy-3 -propyl-4- { 3 - [3 -(2FI-tetrazol-5-yl)-benzenesulfinyl] -benzyloxy} -phenyl)-ethanone (0.150 g, 0.315 mmol), and stir for 30 min. Evaporate solvent. Add 1:10 tetrahydrofuran/ether and soniccate the residue. Filter and collect the solid product.
The title compound was obtained (0.150 g, 0.310 mmol, 96%): 1H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d6) 8 0.86 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.46 (q, J= 9.9 Hz, 2H), 2.55 (s, 3H), 2.57 (m, 2H), 5.32 (s, 2H), 6.65 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 1H), 7.53 (s, 1H), 7.56-7.61 (m, 4H), 7.71 (d, J= 7.4 Hz, 1H), 7.75 (d, J= 9.4 Hz, 1H), 7.84 (s, 1H), 8.06 (m, 1H), 8.24 (m, 1H), 12.85 (s, 1H).
MS (m/z): 475 (M-1).

Example 52 Synthesis of 6- [4-(4-acetyl-3 -hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenoxy] -nicotinic acid.
O 1 ( O
HO O I~ ~ I OH
O N

Mix 6-[4-(4-acetyl-3 -hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenoxy] -nicotinonitrile 0.14 g, 0.34 minol), powdered potassium hydroxide (0.69 g, 12.20 minol), isopropyl alcohol (1.5 mL) and water (1.5 mL). Heat to 130 C for 8 hrs. Allow to cool to ambient temperature. Pour into water (20 mL) and acidify to pH 1 with hydrochloric acid (37% in water, 1 mL). Extract with ethyl acetate (3 x 30 mL). Combine the organic extracts, dry over magnesium sulfate, filter and concentrate under reduced pressure to obtain a residue.
Purification using 5% isopropyl alcohol/chloroformchloroform to 10% isopropyl alcohol/chloroformchloroform as gradient eluent gives the title compound (0.02 g, 17%):
MS (m/z): 420.1 (M-1). 'H NMR (acetone-d6) 12.94 (s, 1H), 8.77 (s, 1H), 8.40 (dd, J=
2.4 Hz, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.84 (d, J = 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.62 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.30 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 2H), 7.15 (d, J = 8.4 Hz, 1H), 6.79 (d, J= 9.2 Hz, 1H), 5.34 (s, 2H), 2.73 (t, J= 7.5 Hz, 2H), 2.63 (s, 3H), 1.66-1.56 (m, 2H), 0.96 (t, J= 7.5 Hz, 3H).

Example 53 Synthesis of 6-[3-(3-hydroxy-2-methyl-4-propionyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenoxy]-nicotinic acid.

O
HO O I~ O NI
OH
O

Dissolve 6-[3-(3-hydroxy-2-methyl-4-propionyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenoxy]-nicotinic acid methyl ester ( 0.10 g, 0.24 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (2 mL).
Add lithium hydroxide (0.007 g, 0.29 mmol) and water (0.5 mL). Stir at ambient temperature for 2 hrs. Add 1 N hydrochloric acid (5 mL) and extract with ethyl acetate (3 x 10 mL).
Combine the organic extracts, dry over magnesium sulfate, filter and concentrate under reduced pressure to obtain a residue. Purification using 5% isopropyl alcohol/chloroformchloroform to 10% isopropyl alcohol/chloroform as gradient eluent gives the title compound (0.06 g, 58%): MS (m/z): 406.1 (M-1). 1H NMR (acetone-d6) 13.00 (s, 1H), 8.76 (s, 1H), 8.40 (dd, J = 1.7 Hz, 8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.86 (d, J=
9.2 Hz, 1H), 7.54 (t, J 8.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.44 (d, J 7.6 Hz, 1 H), 7.3 8(s, 1 H), 7.22 (d, J
8.0 Hz, 1H), 7.15 (d, J 8.5 Hz, 1H), 6.76 (d, J 9.2 Hz, 1H), 5.36 (s, 2H), 3.09 (q, J 7.2 Hz, 2H), 2.14 (s, 3H), 1.20 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 3H).
The following examples are prepared essentially as described for Example 52 or 53.
Ex. # Method Chemical name Structure Physical data 54 Method of 2-[3-(4-Acetyl- o MS (m/z): 420.1 (M-1).
~
Example 3-hydroxy-2- xo )~ ooox 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 52 propyl- 13.82 (bs, 1H), 12.85 (s, phenoxyinethyl) 1H), 8.35 (d, J= 5.1 Hz, -phenoxy]- 1H), 7.83 (d, J = 9.1 Hz, isonicotinic 1H), 7.57 (d, J= 5.1 Hz, acid 111), 7.49 (t, J= 7.9 Hz, 1H), 7.38 (s, 1H), 7.33 (d, J = 7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.24 (s, 1 H), 7.16 (d, J= 7.9 Hz, 1H), 6.73 (d, J= 9.1 Hz, 1H), 5.30 (s, 2H), 2.59 (s, 3H), 2.57 (t, J =
7.6 Hz, 2H), 1.49-1.40 (m, 2H), 0.81 (t, J = 7.6 Hz, 3H).

Ex. # Method Chemical name Structure Physical data 55 Metliod of 6-[3-(4-Acetyl- p LC-MS (m/e): 446 (M-Example 3-hydroxy-2- HO ~' IN~ 1); 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 53 trifluoromethyl- 0 S 13.80 (1H, s), 8.68 phenoxymethyl) (1H,d), 8.32 (1H, dd), -phenoxy]- 8.23 (1 H, d), 7.51 (1 H, nicotinic acid dd), 7.35 (1 H, d), 7.27 (1H, m), 7.18 (2 H, m), 6.84 (1H, d), 5.43 (2 H, s), 2.66 (3 H, s).
56 Method of 3-[3-(4-Acetyl- 'H NMR (400 MHz, Example 3-hydroxy-2- acetone-d6) S 0.93 (t, J=
53 propyl- 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.56 (m, phenoxymethyl) 2H), 2.58 (s, 3H), 2.68 (t, - J= 7.4 Hz, 2H), 5.40 (s, benzenesulfonyl 2H), 6.70 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, ]-benzoic acid o Ho - ~~ 1H), 7.18-7.25 (m, 2H), .S o 7.77-7.84 (m, 2H), 8.04 ~ ~ OH
(d, J= 7.8 Hz, 1H), 8.16 (s, 1 H), 8.23 (d, J= 6.6 Hz, 1H), 8.30 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 8.58 (s, 1H), 12.9 (s, 1H). MS (m/z):
467 (M-1).

Ex. # Method Chemical name Structure Physical data 57 Method for 3-[4-(4-Acetyl- 'H NMR (400 MHz, Example 3-hydroxy-2- acetone-d6) 8 0.91 (t, J=
53 propyl- 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.55 (m, phenoxymethyl) 2H), 2.56 (s, 3H), 2.69 (t, - J= 7.6 Hz, 2H), 5.3 8(s, o benzenesulfonyl Ho 0 2H), 6.65 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, ]-benzoic acid ~~ ~ 1H), 7.18 (m, 2H), 7.73 OS / ~ H
~ (m, 2H), 8.10 (d, J = 7.0 Hz, 2H), 8.28 (t, J= 9.2 Hz, 2H), 8.60 (s, 1H), 12.89 (s, 1H). MS (m/z):
467 (M-1).

58 Method for 4-[4-(4-Acetyl- 'H NMR (400 MHz, Example 3-hydroxy-2- acetone-d6) S 0.92 (t, J=
53 propyl- 0 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.56 (m, phenoxymethyl) OH 2H), 2.57 (s, 3H), 2.69 (t, /\
- - J= 7.4 Hz, 2H), 5.40 (s, 'S:
benzenesulfonyl -~ 2H), 6.67 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, ]-benzoic acid o\/ 1H), 7.75 (m, 3H), 8.09 / (d, J= 7.0 Hz, 2H), 8.15 ox (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2H), 8.23 (d, J= 8.6 Hz, 2H), 12.89 (s, 1H). MS (m/z): 467 (M-1).

Example 59 Synthesis of 2-[3-(4-acetyl-2-carboxy-3-hydroxy-phenoxymethyl)-phenoxy]-isonicotinic acid.

O
HO I O O~ OH
~
O OH

The title compound is prepared essentially as described for 4-[4-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-benzyloxy)-benzenesulfinyl]-benzoic acid (Example 57) employing 2-[3 -(4-acetyl-3 -hydroxy-2-trifluoromethyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenoxy] -isonicotinonitrile.
Heat in microwave reactor for 35 min. at 150 C. (33%). LC-MS (m/e): 422 (M-1); 1H
NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 8.34 (1 H, d), 8.00 (1 H, d), 7.57 (1 H, dd), 7.48 (1 H, dd), 7.39 (1 H, s), 7.31 ( 1 H, d), 7.25 (1 H, s), 7.15 (1 H, m), 6.80 (1 H, d), 5.35 (2 H, s), 2.52 (3 H, s) Preparation 106 Synthesis of dimethyl-thiocarbamic acid S-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenyl) ester.
Stir a mixture of 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3 -propyl-phenyl)-ethanone (2 g, 10.3 mmol), trietliylamine (1.6 mL 11.3 mmol), and dichloroinethane (40 mL) at room temperature.
Add dimethylthiocarbamoyl chloride (1.27 g, 10.3 mmol) and stir at room temperature overnight. Wash the mixture witli 1M hydrochloric acid (25 mL), dry over magnesium sulfate, filter and concentrate. Purify the residue via silica chromatography eluting with hexanes to 7:3 hexanes:ethyl acetate to afford dimethyl-thiocarbamic acid 0-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenyl) ester (1.2 g, 41 %) as a liglit yellow solid. Stir the yellow solid in tetradecane (10 mL) at 250 C for an hour and purify by silica chromatography eluting with hexanes to 6:4 hexanes:ethyl acetate to give the title compound (1.08 g, 90 %) as a white solid. LCMS (xn/z) 280 m-1.

Preparation 107 Synthesis of 1-(2-hydroxy-4-mercapto-3-propyl-phenyl)-ethanone.
Reflux a stirred mixture of dimethyl-thiocarbamic acid S-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenyl) ester (1.08 g, 3.84 mmol), potassium hydroxide (1.1g, 19.2 mmol), ethanol (25 inL), and water (10 mL) for 2 hours. Cool the reaction in an ice/water bath and adjust the pH to 2 with aqueous 5N hydrochloric acid. Extract the mixture with ethyl acetate (3 X 50 mL). Combine the extracts and wash with water (50 mL) and brine (50 mL) and dry over magnesium sulfate, filter, and concentrate to afford the title compound (0.76 g, 94 %) as a brown oil which solidifies on standing. LCMS (m/z) 211 m-1.

Preparation 108 Syntliesis of 2-fluoro-3-methoxy-phenol.
A mixture of 2-fluoroanisole (1.8 ml, 15.85 mmol), pentamethyldiethyenetriamine (3.6 mL, 17.45 mmol) and tetrahydrofuran (10 mL) is stirred at -78 C. A 2.5 M
solution of n-butyllithium in hexanes (7 ml, 17.45 mmol) is added dropwise and the resulting solution is stirred at -78 C 2 hr. Trimethylborate (2 mL, 17.45 mmol) is added and the reaction is warmed to room temperature and stirred 1 hr. Acetic acid (1.4 ml, 23.8 mmol) is added followed by an aqueous 30 % solution of hydrogen peroxide (1.8 mL, 17.45 mmol) and the resulting mixture is stirred rapidly 18 hr at room temperature.
The reaction mixture is diluted with water and extracted with ethyl acetate (3 X
50 mL). The combined extracts are dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concetrated to about 10 mL volume. The resulting mixture is purified via silica chromatography eluting with hexanes to 8:1 hexanes:ethyl acetate to give the title compound (1.65 g, 73 %) as a colorless oil. MS ES 141 m-1.

Preparation 109 Synthesis of 1-(3 -fluoro-2,4-dihydroxy-phenyl)-ethanone.
A solution of 2-fluoro-3-methoxy-phenol (0.5 g, 3.53 mmol) and dichloromethane is stirred at -78 C. A 1M solution of boron tribromide in dichloromethane (3.9 mL, 3.9 mmol) is added slowly and the mixture is stirred 10 min cold, then warmed to 0 C and stirred 1 hr. The reaction is quenched with ice and stirred at room temperature overnight.
The product is extracted with ethyl acetate (2 X 50 mL), dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated. The resulting residue is combined with boron trifluoride diethyl etherate (1.3 mL, 10.3 mmol) and acetic acid (0.2 mL, 3.28 mmol) and heated to reflux 8 hr. The mixture is cooled to room temperature, diluted with water (50 mL), and extracted with ethyl acetate (3 X 50 mL). The combined extracts are dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated to about 10 mL volume. The resulting mixture is diluted with hexanes (50 mL), cooled to 0 C, and filtered to give the title compound (310 mg, 58 %) as a tan solid. MS ES 171 m+l.
Preparation 110 Synthesis of 1-(3 -chloro-2,4-dihydroxy-phenyl)-ethanone.
A solution of 2,4,-dihydroxyacetophenone (6 g, 39.4 mmol), aqueous 1M sodium hydroxide (41.4 mL, 41.4 mmol) and water (200 mL) is stirred at room temperature. An aqueous 1.6M solution of sodium hypochlorite (32 mL) is added over a 1 hr period. The resulting dark brown solution is stirred 18 hr at room temperature. The reaction mixture is adjusted to a pH of 2-3 with concentrated aqueous hydrochloric acid. The resulting suspension is filtered and washed with water (4 X 100 mL). The filtered solid was dried under vacuum at 45 C for 2.5 days to give the title compound (4.8 g, 65 %) as a brown solid. LCMS 1 187 m+.

Preparation 111 Synthesis of 1 -(3 -chloro-2,4-dihydroxy-phenyl)-propan-1-one.
The title compound was prepared in a similar manner to 1-(3-chloro-2,4-dihydroxy-phenyl)-ethanone (Preparation 111) employing 2,4-dihydroxypropiophenone to give 4.5 g, 37 % of an off-white solid. LCMS 1 201 m+.

Preparation 112 Synthesis of 1-[2-hydroxy-4-(4-nitro-benzyloxy)-3-propyl-phenyl]-ethanone.
To 2',4'-dihydroxy-3'-propyl acetophenone (3.0 g, 15.4 mmol) and 4-nitrobenzyl bromide (3.6 g, 17 mmol) in acetone (62 mL) is added K2C03 (3.2 g, 23 mmol).
The reaction mixture is refluxed for lh and cooled to room temperature. The precipitate is filtered, washed with water (5 x 70 mL), and dried to give the title compound (4.8 g, 94%). LC-MS (m/z): 328 (M-1).

Preparation 113 Synthesis of 1-[4-(4-amino-benzyloxy)-2-hydroxy-3-propyl-phenyl]-ethanone.
To 1-[2-Hydroxy-4-(4-nitro-benzyloxy)-3-propyl-phenyl]-ethanone (1.0 g, 3.0 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (13 mL) is added concentrated hydrochloric acid (2.7 mL) and stannous chloride dihydrate (2.2 g, 9.9 mmol). The reaction mixture is stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture is quenched into saturated aqueous (100 mL). The resulting emulsion is filtered and the filtrate extracted with ethyl acetate (3 x 100 mL). The combined organic layers are washed with brine, dried over sodium sulfatesodium sulfate, and concentrated to provide the title compound in crude form (980 mg). LC-MS (m/z): 298 (M-1).
Preparation 114 Synthesis of 1-(2,6-dihydroxy-biphenyl-3-yl)-ethanone.
To a solution of 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-iodo-phenyl)-ethanone (1.0 g, 3.59 mmol;
581938, may be prepared as described in G. Batu and R. Stevenson, J. Org.
Chem. 1979, 44, 3948) in tetrahydrofuran/water (15 mL/ 3 mL) at room temperature is added phenyl boronic acid (0.877 g, 7.19 mmol), Pd(dppf)2C12 (0.088 g, 0.107 mmol), and cesium hydroxide monohydrate (1.81 g, 10.8 mmol). After stirring for 15 hours, the mixture is filtered through a pad of Celite , washing with ethyl acetate. The residue is diluted with 30 mL of 1N hydrochloric acid and extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic phases are washed with brine; dried over magnesium sulfate; filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. The resulting residue is purified by flash chromatography, eluting with 30% ethyl acetate/hexanes to give the title coiupound as a colorless solid:
MS (m/z) 228(M+) ; 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 13.1 (s, 1H), 10.6 (bs, 1H), 7.81 (d, J=
8.8 Hz, 1H), 7.41-7.28 (m, 5H), 6.61 (d, J= 8.8 Hz, 1H), 2.58 (s, 3H); Rf= 0.58 in 40%
ethyl acetate/hexanes.

Preparation 115 Synthesis of 1-(4'-fluoro-2,6-dihydroxy-biphenyl-3-yl)-ethanone.
The title compound is prepared essentially as described in Preparation 119 using 4-fluorophenylboronic acid: mass spectrum (m/e): 245(M-1); 1H NMR (acetone-d6) 13.2 (s, 1H), 7.82 (d, J= 8.4 Hz, 1H), 7.44-7.40 (m, 2H), 7.18-7.13 (m, 2H), 6.61 (d J=
8.8 Hz, 1H), 2.60 (s, 3H); Rf= 0.40 in 40% ethyl acetate/hexanes.

Preparation 116 Synthesis of (6-bromo-pyridin-2-yl)-methanol.
Add n-butyl lithium (16.2 mL, 2.5 M in hexanes, 40.5 mmol) dropwise to a solution of 2,6-dibromopyridine (8.00 g, 33.8 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (100 mL) at -78 C. Stir 30 minutes then add dimethylformamide (12.3 g, 169 mmol) via syringe.

Allow solution to warm to ambient temperature then pour it into a solution of sodium borohydride (17.85 g, 338 mmol) in ethanol (50 mL) at -10 C. After 10 minutes, remove the cooling bath. After 1 hour at ambient temperature, add water and 1N
hydrochloric acid (gas evolution), then add saturated sodium bicarbonate solution until the mixture is neutralized. Extract the aqueous phase with ethyl acetate, dry over sodium sulfate, filter and concentrate under reduced pressure. Dissolve the residue in diethyl ether and add an excess of hydrogen chloride (2N in diethyl ether). Decant the organic phase and add saturated sodium bicarbonate solution to the residue. Extract with ethyl acetate (3 x), dry over sodium sulfate, filter and concentrate under reduced pressure to afford the title compound as a brown oil (2.73 g, 14.5 mmol): MS (m/z): 189 (M+1).
Preparation 117 Synthesis of 1-[4-(6-bromo-pyridin-2-yhnethoxy)-2-hydroxy-3-propyl-phenyl]-ethanone.
Combine (6-bromo-pyridin-2-yl)-methanol (1.00 g, 5.32 mmol), 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-propyl-phenyl)-ethanone (1.033 g, 5.32 mmol) and tri-n-butylphosphine (1.46 mL, 5.85 mmol, Aldrich Chemical Co.) in tetrahydrofuran (5.3 mL), add 1,1'-(azodicarbonyl)dipiperidine (1.48 g, 5.85 mmol, Aldrich Chemical Co.). After 12 hours at ambient temperature, add diethyl ether (white percipitate forms) and filter, collect liquid and remove solvents under reduced pressure. Purify residue by flash chromatography to obtain the title compound as a white solid (854 mg, 2.35 mmol): MS (m/z): 286 (M-Br+l ).
The following compound is prepared essentially by the method of Preparation 117.
Prep.
Chemical name Structure Physical data No.

1-[4-(2-Chloro-pyridin-4- o ~ MS (m/z): 318 (M-118 ylmethoxy)-2-hydroxy-3- xo o I~ cl .N 1)=
propyl-phenyl] -ethanone Example 60 Synthesis of 3-[6-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-pyridin-2-ylsulfanyl]-benzoic acid.

O O
HO O I N S I OH
i To a solution of 3-mercaptobenzoic acid (361 mg, 2.35 mmol) in dimethylformamide (15 mL) add sodium hydride (23 mg, 9.38 inmol) at 0 C, stir 10 min.
Add 1-[4-(6-bromo-pyridin-2-ylmethoxy)-2-hydroxy-3-propyl-phenyl]-ethanone (854 mg, 2.35 mmol), heat to 100 C for 6 hours. Cool to ambient temperature and add diethyl ether, collect the resulting red precipitate by filtration (290 mg). Purify by the residue by preparative LC (inject 110 mg) to yield the title compound as a white solid (50 mg, 0.12 mmol): 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 0.88 (t, 3H), 1.50 (q, 2H), 2.55 (s, 3 H), 2.61 (m, 2H), 5.25 (s, 2H), 6.65 (d, 1H), 6.97 (d, 1H), 7.26 (d, 1H), 7.62 (t, 1H), 7.76 (m, 1H), 7.83 (m, 1H), 8.02 (m, 1H), 8.07 (m, 1H), 12.85 (s, 1H), 13.25 (br s, 1H); MS (m/z):
436 (M-1).
The following compound is prepared essentially by the method of Example 60.
Ex. Chemical name Structure Physical data 'H NMR (DMSO-d6) S
0.77 (t, 3H), 1.36 (m, 2H), 3-[4-(4-Acetyl-3- 2.44 (m, 2H), 2.57 (s, 3 H), hydroxy-2-propyl- 5.25 (s, 2H), 6.58 (d, 1H), 61 phenoxymethyl)- HO oSox 7.02 (m, 1H), 7.20 (m, 1H), I N ~ i pyridin-2-ylsulfanyl]- 7.59 (t, 1H), 7.79 (m, 2H), benzoic acid 8.04 (m, 2H), 8.44 (d, 1H), 12.83 (s, 1H), 13.24 (br s, 1H); MS (m/z): 438 (M+1).
Preparation 119 Synthesis of 3-(5-hydroxymethyl-pyridin-3-ylsulfanyl)-benzoic acid methyl ester.

Dissolve 3-bromo-5-hydroxymethyl-pyridinium chloride' [Kelly, T. R., Howard, H. R., Koe, K., Sarges, R. J. Med. Chem. 1985, 28, 1368-1371] (1.00 g, 4.45 mmol) in saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate, extract three times with ethyl acetate, dry combined organic phases over sodium sulfate, condense to afford (5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-methanol. Employing the procedure of general method 1 using (5-bromo-pyridin-3-yl)-methanol (832 mg) and 3-mercapto-benzoic acid methyl ester (1.50 g, 8.91 mmol). Purify by SCX column, elute with dichloromethane, then 1:1 dichloromethane/methanol then 1:1 dichloromethane/methanol, 10% ammonia, compound elutes in the ammonia, to yield the title compound as a dark brown oil (380 mg, 1.38 mmol): MS (m/z): 276 (M+1).
The following compound is prepared essentially by the method of Preparation 119.
Prep.
Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
3-(6-Hydroxymethyl-pyridin-3-ylsulfanyl)- HO ~ N 120 MS (m/z): 276 (M+1).
benzoic acid methyl O
ester Preparation 121 Synthesis of 3-[5-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-pyridin-3-ylsulfanyl]-benzoic acid methyl ester.
Using the procedure essentially of Preparation 117 using 3-(5-hydroxymethyl-pyridin-3-ylsulfanyl)-benzoic acid methyl ester (370 mg, 1.34 mmol), 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-propyl-phenyl)-ethanone (261 mg, 1.34 mmol) provides the title compound as colorless oil (379 mg, 0.84 mmol): MS (m/z): 452 (M+1).
The following compounds are prepared essentially by the method of Preparation 121.

Prep.
Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
3 - [6 -(4-Acetyl-3 -hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxy o MS (m/z): 450 122 methyl)-pyridin-3- xO 01; N~ ~ ~ (M-1).
i S ~ OMe ylsulfanyl]-benzoic acid 0 methyl ester 6-(4-Acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-123 propyl-phenoxymethyl)- Ho I o N0 OMe MS (m/z): 344 .
pyridine-2-carboxylic acid (M+1).
methyl ester Example 62 Synthesis of 3-[5-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-pyridin-3-ylsulfanyl]-benzoic acid.

o O
HO O S OH
N
Dissolve 3-[5-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-pyridin-3-ylsulfanyl]-benzoic acid methyl ester (379 mg, 0.84 mmol) in methanol (2 mL) and water (0.5 mL). Add 2N aqueous lithium hydroxide solution (0.42 mL, 0.84 mmol).
After 12 hours, concentrate under reduced pressure and dissolve residue in 4N
hydrochloric acid in dioxane. Add water until white precipitate forms, and collect by filtration.
Triturate in ethyl acetate, then methanol. Collect the title compound by filtration as a white solid (317 mg, 0.73 mmol): 'H NMR (DMSO-d6) S 0.76 (t, 3H), 1.37 (m, 2H), 2.47 (m, 2H), 2.58 (s, 3 H), 5.30 (s, 2H), 6.70 (d, 1H), 7.52 (t, 1H), 7.63 (m, 1H), 7.77 (m, 1H), 7.80 (m, 1H), 7.86 (m, 1H), 7.90 (d, 1H), 8.60 (m, 2H), 12.83 (s, 1H), 13.21 (br s, 1H); MS
(m/z): 438 (M+1).
The following compound is prepared essentially by the method of Example 62.

Ex. # Chemical name Structure Physical data 'H NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 0.87 (t, 3H), 1.48 (m, 2H), 2.57 (s, 3H), 2.62 3-[6-(4-Acetyl-3-hydroxy-2- (m, 2H), 5.32 (s, 2H), 63 propyl-phenoxymethyl)- Ho o N ~ 6.69 (d, 1H), 7.38 (m, pyridin-3-ylsulfanyl]- '~ s~~ oH 2H), 7.49 (d, 1H), 7.81 benzoic acid (m, 4H), 8.51 (1, 1H), 12.83 (s, 1H), (acid proton not observed): MS
(m/z): 436 (M-1).

Preparation 124 Synthesis of 1-[4-(6-chloro-pyridin-3-yhnethoxy)-2-hydroxy-3-propyl-phenyl]-ethanone.
Add 5-chloroinethyl-2-chloropyridine (4.12 g, 25.4 mmol) to a solution of of 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-propyl-phenyl)-ethanone (4.94 g, 25.4 mmol) in dimethylformamide (40 mL). After 10 minutes add potassium carbonate (5.27 g, 38.1 mmol) and cesium carbonate (8.28 g, 25.4 mmol). Stir at room temperature for one hour, and then heat to 70 C for 2 hours. Cool, partition between ethyl acetate (300 mL) and water (300 mL).
Wash twice with water, brine, dry, and concentrate. Dissolve the crude solid in dichloromethane, and add hexane (70 mL) slowly. Triturate and filter to afford the title compound as an orange powder (2.95 g, 36%): 'H NMR (CDC13) S 0.94 (t, 3H), 1.55 (sextet, 2H), 2.58 (s, 3H), 2.67 (t, 2H), 5.14 (s, 2H), 6.47 (d, 1H), 7.38 (d, 1H), 7.60 (d, 1 H), 7.73 (d, 1 H), 8.47 (s, 1H), 12.75 (s, 1H).

Example 64 Synthesis of 3-[5-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-pyridin-2-ylsulfanyl]-benzoic acid.

O

I
HO O ~
IN S ~ I OH
O
Dissolve 3-mercapto-benzoic acid (482 mg, 3.13 mmol, commercially available) in dimethylformamide (20 mL) at 0 C. Add washed sodium hydride (300 mg), and stir the mixture for 10 minutes. Add 1-[4-(6-chloro-pyridin-3-ylmethoxy)-2-hydroxy-propyl-phenyl]-ethanone (1.00 g, 3.13 mmol). Stir the mixture at room temperature for 2 hours; then stir at 65 C for 2 hours and finally stir at 120 C overnight.
Dilute in ethyl acetate, and wash with water twice. Extract the organic layer with saturated aqueous sodium bicarbonate. Acidify the aqueous layer with 2N hydrochloric acidhydrochloric acid to pH 3. Extract with ethyl acetate, wash with brine, dry and concentrate to afford 620 mg of a crude red solid. Purify the residue via chromatography, eluting with 1:1 hexane:ethyl acetate to afford the title compound as a light yellow powder (120 mg): 1H
NMR (DMSO-d6) 6 0.84 (s, 3H), 1.44 (sextet, 2H), 2.55 (t, 2H), 2.58 (s, 3H), 5.24 (s, 2H), 6.74 (d, 1 H), 7.14 (d, 1 H), 7.63 (t, 1 H), 7.75 (d, 1H), 7.81-7.84 (m, 2H), 8.02 (d, 1H), 8.05 (s, 1H), 8.51 (s, 1H), 12.84 (s, 1H), 13.21 (bs, 1H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity) 436 (100).

Preparation 125 Synthesis of 1-[2-hydroxy-4-(3-nitro-benzyloxy)-3-propyl-phenyl]-ethanone.
Add 3-bromomethyl nitrobenzene (10.00 g, 46.3 mmol) to a solution of 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-propyl-phenyl)-ethanone (8.99 g, 46.3 minol) in dimethylformamide (60 mL). After 10 minutes add potassium carbonate (9.60 g, 69.4 mmol) and cesium carbonate (15.08 g, 46.3 mmol). Stir at room temperature for one hour, then lieat to 70 C
for 1.5 hours. Cool and add water (250 mL). Triturate for 15 minutes. Filter.
Wash the solid with water several times, and then wash with hexanes. Dry to afford the title compound as an off white/light gray powder (12.9 g, 85%): 'H NMR (DMSO-d6) 6 0.91 (t, 3H), 1.52 (m, 2H), 2.58 (s, 3H), 2.63 (m, 2H), 5.42 (s, 2H), 6.72 (d, 1H), 7.73 (t, 1H), 7.83 (d, 1H), 7.90 (d, 1H), 8.21 (d, 1H), 8.34 (s, 1H), 12.88 (bs, 1H).

The following compound is prepared essentially by the method of Preparation 125.

Prep.
Chemical name Structure Physical data No.

'H NMR (DMSO-d6) S 0.87 0 (t, 3H), 1.46 (sextet, 2H), 1-[2-Hydroxy-4-(2- I N0Z 2.54 (t, 2H), 2.58 (s, 3H), 126 nitro-benzyloxy)-3- HO 0 5.58 (s, 2H), 6.72 (d, 1H), propyl-phenyl]-ethanone 7.65 (t, 1H), 7.76-7.85 (m, 3H), 8.15 (d, 1H), 12.86 (s, 1 H).

Preparation 127 Synthesis of 1-[4-(3-amino-benzyloxy)-2-hydroxy-3-propyl-phenyl]-ethanone.
Add zinc (21.6 g, 331 mmol) slowly to a solution of 1-[2-hydroxy-4-(3-nitro-benzyloxy)-3-propyl-phenyl]-ethanone (10.9 g, 6.07 mmol) in glacial acetic acid (120 mL). Stir the mixture for 3 hours. Dilute with dichlorometliane (600 mL).
Filter the reaction mixture througli celite. Wash the celite pad several times with dichloromethane.
Concentrate the combined filtrates. Partition the residue between ethyl acetate and saturated sodium bicarbonate. Wash the organic layer with brine, dry and concentrate to afford the title compound as a yellow solid (9.75 g, 98%): 'H NMR (CDC13) 8 0.96 (t, 3H), 1.58 (sextet, 2H), 2.54 (s, 3H), 2.71 (t, 2H), 5.07 (s, 2H), 6.46 (d, 1H), 6.62 (d, 1H), 6.71 (s, 1 H), 6.78 (d, 1H), 7.16 (t, 1H), 7.54 (d, 1H), 12.75 (s, 1H).
The following compound is prepared essentially by the metliod of Preparation 127.

Prep.
Chemical name Structure Physical data No.
'H NMR (CDC13) 8 0.92 (t, 3H), 1.51 1-[4-(2-Amino- p (sextet, 2H), 2.57 (s, benzyloxy)-2- I NHZ 3H), 2.63 (t, 2H), 128 hydroxy-3-propyl- Ho 0 5.10 (s, 2H), 6.61 (d, phenyl]-ethanone 1H), 6.73 (d, 1H), 6.75 (t, 1H), 7.15-7.21 (m, 2H), 7.60 (d, 1H), 12.74 (s, 1H).

Preparation 129 Synthesis of 3-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylamino]-benzoic acid methyl ester.
Combine 1-[4-(3-amino-benzyloxy)-2-hydroxy-3-propyl-phenyl]-ethanone (500 mg, 1.67 mmol), 3-bromo-benzoic acid methyl ester (326 mg, 1.52 mmol) and cesium carbonate (693 mg, 2.13 mmol) in toluene (25 mL) and stir. Purge reaction vessel with argon. Add BINAP [rac-2,2'-Bis(diphenyl-phosphino)-1,1'-binaphthyl] (142 mg, 0.228 mmol), and palladium acetate (34 mg, 0.152 mmol). Purge reaction vessel with argon.
Heat to 100 C. After 18 hours, cool to ambient temperature. Add 10% aqueous citric acid, and extract with ethyl acetate. Combine the organic layers, dry with sodium sulfate, filter and concentrate to dryness. Purify the resulting residue by flash chromatography eluting with ethyl acetate:hexanes to yield the title compound as a white solid (280 mg, 43%): 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 0.81 (t, 3H), 1.46 (sextet, 2H), 2.57 (m, 5H), 3.82 (s, 3H), 5.23 (s, 2H), 6.71 (d, 1H), 6.95 (d, 1H), 7.01 (d, 1H), 7.19 (m, 1H), 7.28-7.41 (m, 4H), 7.65 (m, 1H), 7.81 (d, 1H), 8.49 (bs, 1H), 12.84 (s, 1H).
Preparation 130 Synthesis of 5-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylamino]-nicotinic acid methyl ester.

Combine 1-[4-(3-amino-benzyloxy)-2-hydroxy-3-propyl-phenyl]-ethanone (500 mg, 1.67 mmol), 5-bromo-nicotinic acid methyl ester (328 mg, 1.52 mmol) and cesium carbonate (693 mg, 2.13 mmol) in toluene (25 mL) and stir. Purge reaction vessel with Argon. Add BINAP [rac-2,2'-Bis(diphenyl-phosphino)-1,1'-binaphthyl] (142 mg, 0.228 mmol), and palladium acetate (34 mg, 0.152 mmol). Purge reaction vessel with argon.
Heat to 100 C. After 18 hours, cool to ambient temperature. Add 10% aqueous citric acid, and extract with ethyl acetate. Combine the organic layers, dry with sodium sulfate, filter and concentrate to yield a residue. Purify the residue by flash chromatography eluting with ethyl acetate:hexanes to yield a yellow solid (250 mg, 38%):'H
NMR
(DMSO-d6) S 0.81 (t, 3H), 1.46 (sextet, 2H), 2.57 (m, 5H), 3.86 (s, 3H), 5.25 (s, 2H), 6.72 (d, 1H), 7.03 (d, 1H), 7.08 (d, 1H), 7.24 (bs, 1H), 7.35 (t, 1H), 8.54 (dd, 1H), 8.69 (bs, 1H), 12.84 (s, 1H).
Example 65 Synthesis of 3-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylamino]-benzoic acid.
~ CO2H
y C HO O NH

Add 1M aqueous lithium hydroxide (3.23 mL, 3.23 mmol) to a solution of 3-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylamino]-benzoic acid methyl ester (280 mg, 0.646 mmol) in isopropanol (25 mL) and stir. Heat to 80 C. After 1 hour, pour reaction into 1N aqueous hydrochloric acid (50 mL) and extract with ethyl acetate.
Combine organic layers, dry with sodium sulfate, filter and concentrate to dryness. Purify the resulting residue by trituration (ether:hexanes) to yield the title compound as a yellow solid (200 mg, 74%): 'H NMR (DMSO-d6) S 0.81 (t, 3H), 1.46 (sextuplet, 2H), 2.58 (m, 5H), 5.23 (s, 2H), 6.71 (d, 1 H), 6.94 (d, 1H), 7.02 (d, 1H), 7.19 (s, 1H), 7.29 (m, 3H), 7.40 (d, 1 H), 7.65 (s, 1H), 7.81 (d, 111), 8.44 (s, 1 H), 12.73-12.92 (bs, 1H), 12.84 (s, 1H);
MS (esi negative) m/z (rel intensity) 418 (100).

Example 66 Synthesis of sodium 5-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylamino]-nicotinate.

0 Na N O
O
HO O I ~ NH
~

Add 1M aqueous lithium hydroxide (2.88 mL, 2.88 mmol) to a solution of 5-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylamino]-nicotinic acid methyl ester (250 mg, 0.575 mmol) in isopropanol (10 mL):tetrahydrofuran (5 mL) and stir.
Heat to 80 C. After 1 hour, pour reaction into water (50 mL) and wash with metliyl tert-butyl ether. Acidify with 2N aqueous hydrochloric acid, and extract with ethyl acetate.
Combine organic layers, dry with sodium sulfate, filter and concentrate to dryness.
Dissolve the resulting residue in ethyl acetate (10 mL), and add a solution of sodium ethyl hexanoate (83 mg, 0.499 mmol) in ethyl acetate (5 mL). After 30 minutes, filter the resulting precipitate to yield the title product as a white solid (77 mg, 30%): 'H NMR
(Methanol) b 0.88 (t, 3H), 1.54 (sextuplet, 2H), 2.56 (s, 3H), 2.67 (t, 2H), 3.64 (s, 1H), 5.19 (s, 2H), 6.66 (d, 1 H), 7.02 (d, 1H), 7.11 (dd, 1H), 7.25 (s, 1H), 7.31 (t, 1H), 7.74 (d, 1H), 8.05 (m, 1H), 8.28 (d, 1H), 8.52 (d, 1H); MS (esi negative) m/z (rel intensity) 419 (100).
Example 67 Syntllesis of 2-[3-(4-acetyl-3 -hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylamino] -nicotinic acid.
O
O OH
H
HO O N
~ N

Heat a mixture of 2-chloro-nicotinic acid (132 mg, 0.835 mmol) and 1-[4-(3-amino-benzyloxy)-2-hydroxy-3-propyl-phenyl]-ethanone (250 mg, 0.835 mmol) to C. After 18 hours, cool to ambient temperature and purify via flash chromatography (ethyl acetate:hexanes) to give a residue which was fiirther purified by reverse phase chromatography (methanol:acetic acid:water) to yield the title product as a yellow solid (32 mg, 9%): 'H NMR (DMSO-d6) S 0.88 (t, 3H), 1.51 (sextet, 2H), 2.57 (s, 3H), 2.63 (t, 2H), 5.27 (s, 2H), 6.73 (d, 1H), 6.87 (dd, 1 H), 7.06 (d, 1H), 7.34 (t, 1 H), 7.67 (d, 1H), 7.81 (d, 1H), 7.88 (s, 1H), 8.26 (dd, 1H), 8.36 (dd, 1H), 10.66 (bs, 1H), 12.85 (s, 1H), 13.63 (bs, 1H); MS (esi negative) mlz (rel intensity) 419 (100).
Preparation 131 Synthesis of 2-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylamino]-isonicotinic acid methyl ester.
Combine 1-[4-(3-amino-benzyloxy)-2-hydroxy-3-propyl-phenyl]-ethanone (500 mg, 1.67 mmol), 2-cliloro-isonicotinic acid methyl ester (287 mg, 1.67 mmol) and cesium carbonate (762 mg, 2.34 mmol) in toluene (25 mL) and stir. Purge reaction vessel with argon. Add 2-(bicyclohexylphosphino)biphenyl (234 mg, 0.668 mmol), and tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium (153 mg, 0.167 mmol). Purge reaction vessel with argon. Heat to 110 C. After 18 hours, cool to ambient temperature. Add diethyl etlier (25 mL) and filter. Concentrate filtrate under reduced pressure to dryness.
Purify the resulting residue by flash cliromatography eluting with ethyl acetate:hexanes to yield the title coinpound as a yellow solid (282 mg, 39%): 'H NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 0.86 (t, 3H), 1.52 (sextet, 2H), 2.57 (s, 3H), 2.63 (t, 2H), 3.88 (s, 3H), 5.25 (bs, 2H), 6.72 (d, 1H), 6.99 (d, 1H), 7.14 (d, 1H), 7.31 (t, 1H), 7.39 (s, 1H), 7.58 (d, 1H), 7.80 (d, 1H), 7.91 (s, 1H), 8.29 (d, 1 H), 9.43 (s, 1H), 12.85 (s, 1 H).
Example 68 Synthesis of 2-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylamino]-isonicotinic acid.
O
H
HO O N I N~

Add 1M aqueous lithium hydroxide (2.14 mL, 2.14 mmol) to a solution of 2-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylamino]-isonicotinic acid methyl ester (282 mg, 0.649 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (20 mL):water (20 mL) and stir.
Heat to 80 C. After 1 hour, pour reaction into 1N aqueous hydrochloric acid (50 mL) and filter the resulting precipitate to yield the title compound as a yellow solid (59 mg, 22%): 'H
NMR (DMSO-d6) S 0.86 (t, 3H), 1.52 (sextet, 2H), 2.57 (s, 3H), 2.63 (t, 2H), 5.25 (s, 2H), 6.72 (d, 1H), 6.99 (d, 1H), 7.13 (d, 1H), 7.30 (t, 1H), 7.37 (s, 1H), 7.56 (d, 1H), 7.80 (d, 1H), 7.91 (s, 1H), 8.28 (d, 1H), 9.37 (s, 1H), 12.85 (s, 1H), 13.44 (bs, 1H);
MS (esi negative) m/z (rel intensity) 419 (100).
Example 69 Synthesis of 2- [3 -(4-acetyl-3 -hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylamino] -nicotinic acid.

H O
HO O I~ N I N OH
i Heat a mixture of 6-chloro-pyridine-2-carboxylic acid (263 mg, 1.67 mmol) and 1-[4-(3-amino-benzyloxy)-2-hydroxy-3-propyl-phenyl]-ethanone (500 mg, 1.67 mmol) to 130 C. After 18 hours, cool to ambient temperature. Purify the resulting residue by reverse phase chromatography (methanol:acetic acid:water) to yield the title product as a yellow solid (75 mg, 11%): 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 6 0.84 (t, 3H), 1.48 (sextet, 2H), 2.57 (s, 3H), 2.60 (t, 2H), 5.22 (s, 2H), 6.73 (d, 1 H), 6.99 (d, 1 H), 7.03 (d, 1 H), 7.31 (t, 1H), 7.43 (d, 1 H), 7.70 (t, 1H), 7.77 (s, 1 H), 7.79 (d, 1H), 7.89 (d, 1H), 9.34 (s, 1 H), 12.84 (s, 1H), 12.89 (bs, 1H); MS (esi negative) mlz (rel intensity) 419 (100).
Preparation 132 Syntliesis of 3-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylamino]-benzonitrile.

Combine 1-[4-(3-amino-benzyloxy)-2-hydroxy-3-propyl-phenyl]-ethanone (1.65g, 5.51 mmol), 3-bromo-benzonitrile (912 mg, 5.01 mmol), cesium carbonate (2.29 g, 7.01 mmol), and 18-crown-6 (132 mg, 0.501 mmol) in toluene (25 mL) and stir. Purge reaction vessel with argon. Add BINAP [rac-2,2'-bis(diphenyl-phosphino)-1,1'-binaphthyl] (468 mg, 0.752 mmol), and palladium acetate (112 mg, 0.501 mmol).
Purge reaction vessel with argon. Heat to 100 C for 18 hours and cool to ambient temperature.
Add 10% aqueous citric acid, and extract with ethyl acetate. Combine the organic layers, dry with sodium sulfate, filter and concentrate to dryness. Purify the resulting residue by flash chromatography eluting with 30% ethyl acetate:hexanes to yield a yellow oil (1.36g, 68%): 'H NMR (CDC13) 8 0.92 (t, 3H), 1.56 (sextet, 2H), 2.56 (s, 3H), 2.69 (t, 2H), 5.15 (s, 2H), 5.86 (bs, 1H), 6.49 (d, 1H), 7.06 (m, 2H), 7.15-7.21 (m, 3H), 7.27-7.37 (m, 3H), 7.59 (d, 1H), 12.75 (s, 1H).
Preparation 133 Synthesis of 4-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylamino]-benzonitrile.
Combine 1-[4-(3-amino-benzyloxy)-2-hydroxy-3-propyl-phenyl]-ethanone (1.OOg, 3.34 mmol), 4-bromo-benzonitrile (553 mg, 3.03 mmol), cesium carbonate (1.39 g, 4.25 mmol), and 18-crown-6 (80 mg, 0.304 nunol) in toluene (25 mL) and stir. Purge reaction vessel with argon. Add BINAP [rac-2,2'-bis(diphenyl-phosphino)-1,1'-binaphthyl] (284 mg, 0.456 mmol), and palladium acetate (68 mg, 0.304 mmol). Purge reaction vessel with argon. Heat to 100 C. After 18 hours, cool to ambient temperature. Add 10%
aqueous citric acid, and extract with ethyl acetate. Combine the organic layers, dry with sodium sulfate, filter and concentrate to dryness. Purify the resulting residue by flash chromatography eluting with 30% ethyl acetate:hexanes to yield the title compound as a yellow solid (760 mg, 63%):'H NMR (CDC13) 8 0.92 (t, 3H), 1.58 (sextet, 2H), 2.56 (s, 3H), 2.69 (t, 2H), 5.15 (s, 2H), 6.07 (bs, 1H), 6.47 (d, 1H), 6.98 (d, 2H), 7.13 (t, 2H), 7.23 (m, 1H), 7.38 (t, 1H), 7.49 (d, 2H), 7.58 (d, 1H), 12.75 (s, 1H).
Example 69 Synthesis of 1-(2-hydroxy-3-propyl-4-{3-[3-(2H-tetrazol-5-yl)-phenylainino]-benzyloxy} -plienyl)-ethanone.

H
H N-N
HO O I: N N' Using the general procedure for formation of tetrazole (Et3NHCl method) of Example 1 using 3-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylamino]-benzonitrile (1.36 g, 3.39 mmol), sodium azide (662 mg, 10.2 mmol), and triethylamine hydrocliloride (1.40 g, 10.2 mmol) to yield the title product as a yellow solid (313 mg, 21%): 'H NMR (DMSO-d6) S 0.791 (t, 3H), 1.43 (sextuplet, 2H), 2.57 (m, 5H), 5.24 (s, 2H), 6.72 (d, 1H), 6.98 (d, 1H), 7.08 (d, 1H), 7.24 (m, 2H), 7.32 (t, 1H), 7.44 (m, 2H), 7.79 (m, 2H), 8.55 (s, 1H), 12.84 (s, 1H); MS (esi negative) m/z (rel intensity) 442 (100).

Example 70 Synthesis of 1-(2-hydroxy-3-propyl-4-{3-[4-(2H-tetrazol-5-yl)-phenylamino]-benzyloxy} -phenyl)-ethanone.
O

H
HO I O N
~
N-N
H
Using the general procedure for formation of tetrazole (Et3NHC1 method) of Example 1 using 4-[3-(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxymethyl)-phenylamino]-benzonitrile (380 mg, 0.949 mmol), sodium azide (308 mg, 4.74 mmol), and triethylamine hydrochloride (653 mg, 4.74 mmol) to yield the title product as a white solid (120 mg, 29%): 'H NMR (DMSO-d6) S 0.785 (t, 3H), 1.44 (sextuplet, 2H), 2.52 (s, 3H), 2.55 (t, 2H), 5.20 (s, 2H), 6.68 (d, 1H), 6.97 (d, 1H), 7.04 (d, 1H), 7.15 (d, 2H), 7.24 (s, 1H), 7.29 (t, 1H), 7.76 (d, 1 H), 7.82 (d, 2H), 8.69 (s, 1 H), 12.80 (s, 1 H); MS (esi negative) m/z (rel intensity) 442 (100).

Preparation 134 Synthesis of 1-[4-(4-bromomethyl-benzyloxy)-3-chloro-2-hydroxy-phenyl]-ethanone Combine 1-(3-chloro-2,4-dihydroxy-phenyl)-ethanone (6.00 g, 32.2 mmol) and 1,4-bis-bromomethyl-benzene (8.48 g, 31.2 mmol) and potassiuin carbonate (4.44 g, 32.2 mmol) in acetone (400 ml) and heat to reflux. After 1 h, cool to room temperature and add 10% hydrochloric acid (300 mL). Filter to collect and triturate resultant solid in 1:1 ether/hexanes. Purify by column chromatography, eluting with 40%
tetrahydrofuran/hexanes to obtain 1-[4-(4-bromomethyl-benzyloxy)-3-chloro-2-hydroxy-phenyl]-ethanone (3.00 g, 8.12 mmol) as a white solid. MS (m/z): 368.9 (M-1).
Preparation 135 Synthesis of 1 -(3 -bromo-phenyl)-3 -dimethylamino-propenone.
Combine 1-(3-bromo-phenyl)-ethanone (10 g, 50.2 mmol) and dimethylformamide dimethylacetal (60 g, 502 mmol) in a sealed tube, heat to 150 C for 12 hours. Cool the solution and evaporate the excess dimethylformamide dimethylacetal.
Purify residue by column chromatography to obtain the title compound (3.05 g, 12.0 mmol) as a white solid. MS (m/z): 254.1 (M).

Preparation 136 Synthesis of 4-(3-bromo-phenyl)-pyrimidin-2-ol.
Combine 1-(3-bromo-phenyl)-3-dimethylamino-propenone (3.00 g, 11.8 mmol), urea (544 mg, 11.8 mmol), sodium ethoxide (4.00 g, 21% wt in ethanol) and ethanol (24 mL) and heat to 150 C in sealed tube overnight. Cool to room temperature and pour into 1% hydrochloric acid (50 mL). Collect white solid by filtration to obtain 4-(3-bromo-phenyl)-pyrimidin-2-ol (2.60 g, 10.4 mmol). MS (m/z): 251.2 (M+1).

Preparation 137 Synthesis of 4-[3-(5,5-dimethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborinan-2-yl)-phenyl]-pyrimidin-2-ol.
Combine 4-(3-bromo-phenyl)-pyrimidin-2-ol (1.50 g, 5.97 mmol), bis(neopentyl glycolato)diboron (1.62 g, 7.17 mmol), Pd(dppf)C12 (505 mg, 0.597 mmol) and potasium acetate (1.76 g, 17.9 mmol) in a purged (N2) flask, add dry DMSO (50 mL) and plunge into a 80 C bath. Heat overnight, then pour into 1% hydrochloric acid (100 mL).
Neutralize with sodium bicarbonate, and extract with etliyl acetate, dry, filter and condense to afford 4-[3-(5,5-dimethyl-[1,3,2]dioxaborinan-2-yl)-phenyl]-pyrimidin-2-ol (300 mg) as a brown solid. MS (m/z): 173.1 (M-C5H1nB02+1).
Preparation 138 Synthesis of 4-(3-bromo-phenyl)-pyrimidin-2-ylamine.
Combine 1-(3-bromo-phenyl)-3-dimethylamino-propenone (3.00 g, 11.8 mmol) and guanidinium chloride (1.12 g, 11.8 mmol), sodium ethoxide (5 mL, 21% wt solution in ethanol), absolute EtOH (24 mL) and heat to reflux overnight. Cool to room temperature and pour into 1% hydrochloric acid (200 mL). Extract with ethyl acetate, dry over sodiuin sulfate and condense to afford 4-(3-bromo-phenyl)-pyrimidin-2-ylamine (930 mg, 3.72 mmol) as a white solid. MS (m/z): 250.2 (M).
Preparation 139 Synthesis of 4-[3-(5,5-dimetlryl-[1,3,2]dioxaborinan-2-yl)-phenyl]-pyrimidin-2-ylamine.
The title compound is prepared essentially as described for Preparation 137 using 4-(3-bromo-phenyl)-pyrimidin-2-ylamine (2.00 g, 8.00 mmol). The title compound is isolated (1.71 g, 6.04 mmol) as a brown solid. MS (m/z): 216.2 (M-C5Hg+1).

Preparation 140 Synthesis of 3-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yloxymethyl)-benzonitrile.
Add p-toluene sulphonic acid (2.11 g, 12.2 nunol) to a solution of 3-hydroxymethyl-benzonitrile(16.30 g, 122.4 mmol) and 3,4-dihydro-2H-pyran (51.5 g, 612 mmol) in dicliloromethane (500 ml) and stir. After 90 minutes, pour reaction into saturated sodium bicarbonate, remove organics, dry with sodium sulfate, filter and concentrate to give a dark brown oil. Purify the residue by flash chromatography eluting with a gradient of 10-15% ethyl acetate:hexanes to yield the title product as a clear oil (16.20 g, 61%): 1H NMR (CDCl3) 8 1.53-1.91 (m, 6H), 3.56 (m, 1H), 3.88 (m, 1H), 4.53 (d, 1H), 4.72 (t, 1H), 4.81 (d, 1H), 7.45 (t, 1H), 7.58 (m, 2H), 7.69 (s, 1H) Preparation 141 Synthesis of 3-[3-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yloxymethyl)-phenyl]-4H-[1,2,4]oxadiazol-5-one.
Add 50% aqueous hydroxylamine(9.73 g, 147 mmol) dropwise to a refluxing solution of 3-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yloxyinethyl)-benzonitrile(8.00 g, 36.8 mmol) in isopropanol (0.1M). After 2 hours, cool to room temperature and concentrate under reduced pressure to give a residue. Dissolve the residue in dioxane (0.1M).
Add carbonyldiimidazole (7.16 g, 44.2 mmol) and heat to 110 C. After 30 minutes, cool to room temperature and pour into water. Extract with ethyl acetate. Combine the organic layers, dry with sodium sulfate, filter and concentrate under reduced pressure to yield the title product as a white solid (9.10g, 89%): 'H NMR (CDC13) 6 1.53-1.95 (m, 6H), 3.59 (m, 1 H), 3.93 (m, 1H), 4.58 (d, 1H), 4.77 (t, 1H), 4.88 (d, 1 H), 7.52 (t, 1 H), 7.57 (d, 1 H), 7.71 (d, 1 H), 7.82 (s, 1 H), 11.16 (bs, 1 H) Preparation 142 Synthesis of 3 -(3 -hydroxymethyl-phenyl)-4H- [ 1,2,4] oxadiazol-5 -one.
Add 10% hydrochloric acid (100 ml) to a solution of 3-[3-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yloxymethyl)-phenyl]-4H-[1,2,4]oxadiazol-5-one(4.50 g, 16.3 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (0.1M) and stir. After 18 hours, pour reaction into brine and extract with etliyl acetate.
Combine the organic layers, dry with sodium sulfate, filter and concentrate under reduced pressure to yield the title product as a white solid (3.10 g, 99%): 'H NMR
(DMSO-d6) 6 4.57 (s, 2H), 7.55 (m, 2H), 7.67 (dt, 1H), 7.81 (m, 1H), 12.95 (bs, 1H).

Preparation 143 Synthesis of 3-(5-oxo-4,5-dihydro-[1,2,4]oxadiazol-3-yl)-benzaldehyde.
Add pyrdinium chloro chromate (5.22 g, 24.2 mmol) to a solution of 3 -(3 -hydroxymethyl-phenyl)-4H- [ 1,2,4] oxadiazol-5 -one (3.10 g, 16.1 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran:dichloromethane (125 mL:125mL) and stir. After 4 liours concentrate under reduced pressure to give a residue. Purify the residue by flash chromatography eluting with ethyl acetate:hexanes:acetic acid (50%:50%:0.1%) to yield the title product as a white solid (2.20 g, 72%): 'H NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 7.83 (t, 1H), 8.10-8.17 (in, 2H), 8.35 (m, 1H), 10.09 (s, 1H), 13.15 (bs, 1H).
Preparation 144 Synthesis of 1-[2-hydroxy-4-(4-iodo-benzyloxy)-3-propyl-phenyl]-ethanone.
Add 1-bromomethyl-4-iodo-benzene (10.00 g, 33.7 mmol) to a solution of 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-propyl-phenyl)-ethanone (6.54 g, 33.7 mmol) and cesium carbonate (13.2 g, 40.4 mmol) in acetone (500 mL) and stir. After 48 hours, pour the reaction into water and extract with ethyl acetate. Combine the organic layers, dry with sodium sulfate, filter and concentrate under reduced pressure to give a residue.
Purify the residue by flash chromatography eluting with a gradient of ethyl acetate:hexanes to yield the title product as a yellow solid (7.20 g, 52%): 'H NMR (CDC13) S 0.95 (t, 3H), 1.56 (sextet, 2H), 2.56 (s, 3H), 2.69 (t, 2H), 5.09 (s, 2H), 6.43 (d, 1H), 7.15 (d, 2H), 7.57 (d, 1H), 7.73 (d, 2H), 12.74 (s, 1H).
Preparation 145 Synthesis of 1-(4-iodo-benzyloxy)-2-propyl-3 -trimethylsilanyloxy-4-(1-trimethylsilanyloxy-vinyl)-benzene.
Add lithium hexamethyldisilazide (1M solution in tetrahydrofuran, 5.36 ml, 5.36 mmol) to a solution of 1-[2-hydroxy-4-(4-iodo-benzyloxy)-3-propyl-phenyl]-ethanone(1.00 g, 2.44 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (25 mL) cooled to -78 C. After 1 hour, add trimethylsilyl chloride (794 mg, 7.31 mmol). After 1 hour, warm reaction to room temperature and stir overnight. Pour the reaction into saturated sodium bicarbonate and extract with ethyl acetate. Combine the organic layers, dry with sodium sulfate, filter, and concentrate. Dry on high-vac overnight to yield the title product as a darlc yellow oil (1.35 g, 99%): 1H NMR (CDC13) 8 0.16 (s, 9H), 0.23 (s, 9H), 0.94 (t, 3H), 1.52 (sextet, 2H), 2.60 (t, 2H), 4.49 (s, 1H), 4.53 (s, 1 H), 4.99 (s, 2H), 6.49 (d, 1H), 7.10 (d, 1H), 7.17 (d, 2H), 7.71 (d, 2H).

Preparation 146 Synthesis of 1-[3-chloro-2-hydroxy-4-(4-iodo-benzyloxy)-phenyl]-ethanone.
Add 1-bromomethyl-4-iodo-benzene (10.00 g, 33.7 mmol) to a solution of 1-(3-chloro-2,4-dihydroxy-phenyl)-ethanone (7.92 g, 42.4 mmol) and cesium carbonate (16.6 g, 50.9 mmol) in dimethylformamide (250 mL) and stir. After 18 hours, pour reaction into water and extract with ethyl acetate. Combine organic layers and wash with 2N NaOH. Dry with sodium sulfate, filter, and concentrate under reduced pressure to give a residue. Purify the residue by flash chromatography eluting with a gradient of ethyl acetate:hexanes to yield the title product as a tan solid(4.00 g, 23%):
'H NMR
(DMSO-d6) S 2.62 (s, 3H), 5.33 (s, 2H), 6.87 (d, 1H), 7.27 (d, 2H), 7.78 (d, 2H), 7.94 (d, 1H), 13.13 (s, 1 H).

Preparation 147 Synthesis of 2-chloro-l-(4-iodo-benzyloxy)-3-trimethylsilanyloxy-4-(1-trimethyl-silanyloxy-vinyl)-benzene.
Add sodium hexamethyldisilazide (1M solution in tetrahydrofuran, 21.9 mL, 21.9 mmol) to a solution of 1-[3-chloro-2-hydroxy-4-(4-iodo-benzyloxy)-phenyl]-ethanone (4.00 g, 9.94 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran(100 mL) chilled to -78 C. After 1 hour, add trimethylsilyl chloride (3.24 g, 29.8 mmol). After 1 hour, warm reaction to room temperature and stir overnight. Pour reaction into saturated sodium bicarbonate and extract with ethyl acetate. Combine organic layers, dry with sodium sulfate, filter, and concentrate. Dry in vacuo overnight to yield the title product as a dark yellow oil (5.30 g, 98%): 'H NMR (CDC13) 8 0.21 (s, 9H), 0.28 (s, 9H), 4.55 (s, 1H), 4.79 (s, 1H), 5.08 (s, 2H), 6.56 (d, 1H), 7.22 (m, 3H), 7.71 (d, 2H) Preparation 148 Synthesis of 3-(teNt-butyl-dimethyl-silanyloxymethyl)-benzonitrile.
Add tert-butyl-chloro-dimethyl-silane (11.9 g, 78.9 mmol) to a solution of 3-hydroxymethyl-benzonitrile (10.00 g, 75.10 mmol) and imidazole (6.14 g, 90.1 mmol) in dichloromethane (1 L) and stir. After 18 hours, pour reaction into 1%
hydrochloric acid. Remove organic layer, dry with sodium sulfate, filter, and concentrate under reduced pressure to yield the title product as a clear yellow oil (18.5 g, 99%): 'H NMR
(CDC13) 8 0.12 (s, 6H), 0.95 (s, 9H), 4.75 (s, 2H), 7.43 (t, 1H), 7.53 (d, 2H), 7.63 (s, 1H).

Preparation 149 Synthesis of [3 -(2-oxo-2,3 -dihydro-2k4- [1,2,3,5] oxathiadiazol-4-yl)-phenyl] -methanol.
Add hydroxylainine (50% aqueous solution, 5.34 g, 80.8 mmol) dropwise to a refluxing solution of 3-(tert-butyl-dimethyl-silanyloxymethyl)-benzonitrile(5.00 g, 20.2 mmol) in isopropanol (0.1 M). After 2 hours, concentrate the reaction under reduced pressure and azeotrope with toluene. Add dichloromethane (0.1 M) and pyridine (1.92 g, 24.3 mmol) and cool reaction to -78 C. Add thionyl chloride (2.64 g, 22.2 mmol) via syringe. After 4 hours, warm the reaction to room temperature. Concentrate the reaction under reduced pressure. Add tetrahydrofuran (0.1M) and 10% hydrochloric acid (0.1M) and stir. After 18 hours, add brine and extract with 25% isopropyl alcohol:75%
dichloromethane. Coinbine organic layers, dry with sodium sulfate, filter and concentrate under reduced pressure to yield the title product as a yellow solid (3.90 g, 91%): 'H
NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 4.63 (s, 2H), 5.42 (bs, 1H), 7.59 (m, 2H), 7.75 (dt, 1H), 7.88 (s, 1H), 12.23 (bs, 1H).

Preparation 150 Synthesis is of 1-[3-chloro-2-hydroxy-4-(3-iodo-benzyloxy)-phenyl]-ethanone.
Add triphenylphosphine (13.6 g, 51.7 mmol) and DIAD (10.5 g, 51.7 mmol) to a solution of (3-iodo-phenyl)-methanol (11.0 g, 47.0 mmol) and 1-(3-Chloro-2,4-di-hydroxyphenyl)-ethanone (8.77 g, 47.0 mmol) in dichloromethane:tetrahydrofuran (250 m1:250 ml) and stir. After 18 hours, concentrate the reaction, and load directly onto silica. Purify the residue by flash chromatography eluting with acetone:hexanes to yield the title product as a white solid (12.2 g, 64%): 1H NMR (DMSO-d6) 8 2.62 (s, 3H), 5.34 (s, 2H), 6.88 (d, 1H), 7.23 (t, 1H), 7.48 (d, 1H), 7.72 (d, 1H), 7.87 (s, 1H), 7.96 (d, 1H), 13.14 (s, 1H) Preparation 151 Synthesis of 2-chloro-l-(3-iodo-benzyloxy)-3-trimethylsilanyloxy-4-(1-trimethyl-silanyloxy-vinyl)-benzene.
Add sodium hexamethyldisilazide (1 M solution in tetrahydrofuran, 20.2 ml, 20.2 mmol) to a solution of 1-[3-chloro-2-hydroxy-4-(4-iodo-benzyloxy)-phenyl]-ethanone (3.70 g, 9.19 mmol) in tetrahydrofuran (100 mL) chilled to -78 C. After 1 hour, add trimethylsilyl chloride (3.00 g, 27.6 mmol). After 1 hour, warm reaction to room temperature and stir overniglit. Pour reaction into saturated sodium bicarbonate and extract with ethyl acetate. Combine organic layers, dry with sodium sulfate, filter, and concentrate. Dry on high-vac overnight to yield the title product as a dark yellow oil (5.0 g, 99%): 'H NMR (CDC13) 8 0.21 (s, 9H), 0.28 (s, 9H), 4.55 (d, 1H), 4.79 (d, 1H), 5.08 (s, 2H), 6.56 (d, 1 H), 7.12 (t, 1H), 7.24 (d, 1H), 7.42 (d, 1 H), 7.65 (d, 1H), 7.82 (s, 1 H) Preparation 152 Synthesis of 2-hydroxymethyl-isonicotinonitrile.
Add ammonium persulfate (70.1 g, 307 mmol) to a solution of isonicotinonitrile (16.00 g, 154 mmol) in methanol:water:sulfuric acid (275 mL:135 mL:11 mL).
Heat solution to reflux. After 24 hours, pour reaction onto ice and neutralize with ammonium hydroxide (70 ml). Extract solution with chloroform (3x600 ml). Combine the organic layers, dry with sodium sulfate, filter, and concentrate under reduced pressure to give a residue. Purify the residue by flash chromatography eluting with acetone:dichloromethane (1:6) to yield the title compound as a white solid (5.86 g, 28%):
1H NMR (CDC13) 8 3.17 (t, 1H), 4.84 (d, 1H), 7.45 (m, 1H), 7.58 (s, 1H), 8.74 (d, 1H) Preparation 153 Synthesis of 5-(3-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio)nicotinonitrile.
Add K2C03 (6.91 g, 50.0 mmol) to a solution of (3-mercaptophenyl)methanol (2.94 g, 21.0 mmol) and 5-bromonicotinonitrile (3.66 g, 20.0 mmol) in DMA (100 mL).
Heat the mixture at 110 C for 2 h. Cool to room temperature. Dilute with EtOAc.
Filter. Wash the residue with EtOAc. Concentrate. Dissolve the residue in EtOAc and filter. Concentrate to afford the title coinpound (4.80 g, quant): 'H NMR
(CDC13) S 2.20 (t, J= 5.5 Hz, 1 H), 4.74 (d, J= 5.5 Hz, 2 H), 7.38-7.44 (m, 3 H), 7.52-7.5 3(m, 1 H), 7.62 (dd, J= 2.0, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 8.62 (dd, J= 2.0, 2.3 Hz, 2 H).
Preparation 154 Synthesis of 5-(4-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio)nicotinonitrile.
Using the method of Preparation 153 using (4-mercaptophenyl)methanol (4.42 g, 31.5 mmol) and 5-bromonicotinonitrile (5.49 g, 30.0 mmol) affords the title compound (3.60 g, 50%): 'H NMR (CDC13) S 1.92 (t, J= 5.9 Hz, 1 H), 4.77 (d, J= 5.9 Hz, 2 H), 7.48 (q, J= 8.2 Hz, 4 H), 7.58 (t, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 8.61 (dd, J= 2.0, 3.1 Hz, 2 H).

Preparation 155 Synthesis of 5-(3-(Hydroxymethyl)phenylthio)picolinonitrile.
Add NaHCO3 (12.0 g, 143 mmol) to a solution of (3-mercaptophenyl)methanol (10.0 g, 71.3 mmol) and 5-bromopicolinonitrile (13.0 g, 71.3 mmol) in DMF.
Heat the mixture overnight. Dilute with ethyl acetate. Wash the mixture with water.
Dry, filter and concentrate to afford the title compound (10.1 g, 59%) (Solidifies after standing).
MS (APCI-pos) m/z (rel intensity): 243 (M+H, 100%).
Preparation 156 Synthesis of 5-(4-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio)picolinonitrile.
Using the method of Preparation 155 using (4-mercaptophenyl)methanol (10.0 g, 71.3 mmol) and 5-bromopicolinonitrile (13.0 g, 71.3 mmol) affords the title compound (4.90 g, 28%).): 243 (M+H, 100%).

Preparation 157 Synthesis of 6-(3-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio)nicotinonitrile.
Using the method of Preparation 155 using (3-mercaptophenyl)methanol (10.0 g, 71.3 mmol) and 6-chloronicotinonitrile (19.8 g, 142.7 mmol) affords the title compound (13.1 g, 76%): 243 (M+H, 100%).
Preparation 158 Synthesis of 2-(3-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio)isonicotinonitrile.
Using the method of Preparation 155 using (3-mercaptophenyl)methanol (6.00 g, 42.8 mmol) and 2-chloroisonicotinonitrile (5.65 g, 40.8 mmol) affords the title compound (6.22 g, 63%): 243 (M+H, 100%).

Preparation 159 Synthesis of 6-(4-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio)isonicotinonitrile.
Using the method of Preparation 155 using (4-mercaptophenyl)methanol (6.00 g, 42.8 mmol) and 6-chloronicotinonitrile (5.65 g, 40.8 mmol) affords the title compound (7.24 g, 73%): 243 (M+H, 100%).
Preparation 160 Synthesis of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)-nicotinonitrile.

o HO I O I~ S I~ CN
N
Add triphenylphosphine (5.24 g, 20.0 mmol) and diisopropylazodicarboxylate (4.04 g, 20.0 mmol) to a solution of 5-(3-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio)nicotinonitrile (4.84 g, 20.0 mmol) and 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-methylphenyl)ethanone (3.32 g, 20.0 mmol) in THF (100 mL). Stir the reaction for 24 h. Quench the reaction with water and extract with EtOAc. Dry, filter and concentrate. Purify the residue by flash chromatography on silica gel eluting with a mixture of EtOAc and hexanes (15:85 to 20:80) to give an off-white solid. Recrystallize the solid from a mixture of EtOAc and hexanes to afford the title compound (3.94 g, 50%): 'H NMR (CDC13) 6 2.14 (s, 3 H), 2.57 (s, 3 H), 5.18 (s, 2 H), 6.44 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.46-7.49 (m, 3 H), 7.52 (s, 1 H), 7.59 (d, J=
9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.62-7.63 (m, 1 H), 8.63-8.64 (m, 2 H), 12.78 (s, 1 H).
Preparation 161 Synthesis of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)-nicotinonitrile.
Using the method of Preparation 160 using 5-(3-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio) nicotinonitrile (3.90 g, 16.1 mmol) and 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-propylphenyl)ethanone (3.13 g, 16.1 mmol) affords the title compound (4.80 g, 71%): 'H NMR (CDC13) S 0.92 (t, J=
7.2 Hz, 3 H), 1.50-1.59 (m, 2 H), 2.57 (s, 3 H), 2.68 (t, J= 7.6 Hz, 2 H), 5.18 (s, 2 H), 6.43 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.44-7.49 (m, 3 H), 7.53 (s, 1 H), 7.59 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.62 (dd, J= 1.6, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 8.63 (dd, J= 1.6, 2.3 Hz, 2 H), 12.75 (s, 1 H).
Preparation 162 Synthesis of 5-(3 -((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3 -hydroxyphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)-nicotinonitrile.
Using the method of Preparation 160 using 5-(3-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio) nicotinonitrile (3.90 g, 16.1 mmol) and 1-(3-ethyl-2,4-dihydroxyphenyl)ethanone (2.90 g, 16.1 mmol) affords the title compound (2.20 g, 34%): 'H NMR (CDC13) S 1.10 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3 H), 2.57 (s, 3 H), 2.71 (q, J= 7.4 Hz, 2 H), 5.18 (s, 2 H), 6.43 (d, J=
9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.44-7.49 (m, 3 H), 7.51 (s, 1 H), 7.59 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.63 (dd, J= 2.0, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 8.64 (t, J= 2.0 Hz, 2 H), 12.75 (s, 1 H).

Preparation 163 Synthesis of 5-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)-nicotinonitrile.
Using the method of Preparation 160 using 5-(4-(hydroxymethyl)phenyltliio) nicotinonitrile (1.20 g, 4.95 mmol) and 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-methylphenyl)ethanone (0.86 g, 5.20 mmol) affords the title compound (787 mg, 41%): 'H NMR (d6-DMSO) 6 2.06 (s, 3 H), 2.58 (s, 3 H), 5.30 (s, 2 H), 6.72 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.51-7.55 (m, 4 H), 7.81 (d, J
= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 8.23 (t, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 8.72 (d, J= 2.0 Hz, 2 H), 8.91 (d, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 12.85 (s, 1 H).

Preparation 164 Synthesis of 5-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)-nicotinonitrile.

Using the method of Preparation 160 using 5-(4-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio) nicotinonitrile (1.20 g, 4.95 mmol) and 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-propylphenyl)ethanone (1.01 g, 5.20 mmol) affords the title compound. MS (APCI-neg) in/z (rel intensity):
417 (M-H, 100%).

Preparation 165 Synthesis of 5-(4-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxyphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)-nicotinonitrile.
Using the method of Preparation 160 using 5-(4-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio) nicotinonitrile (1.20 g, 4.95 mmol) and 1-(3-ethyl-2,4-dihydroxyphenyl)ethanone (937 mg, 5.20 mmol) affords the title compound (750 mg, 37%): 1H NMR (CDC13) 8 1.15 (t, J
= 7.64 Hz, 3 H), 2.57 (s, 3 H), 2.76 (q, J= 7.6 Hz, 2 H), 5.22 (s, 2 H), 6.47 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.49 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2 H),), 7.52 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2 H), 7.60 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.63 (dd, J= 2.0, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 8.64 (t, J= 2.0 Hz, 2 H), 12.75 (s, 1 H).
Preparation 166 Synthesis of 5-(3 -((4-acetyl-3 -hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio) picolinonitrile.

O
HO I~ O I~ S nF
N CN

Add triphenylphosphine (1.84 g, 7.02 mmol) and diisopropylazodicarboxylate (1.42 g, 7.02 mmol) to a solution of 5-(3-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio)picolinonitrile (1.70 g, 7.02 mmol) and 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-methylphenyl)ethanone (1.17 g, 7.02 mmol) in THF (35.1 mL). Stir overnight. Dilute with ethyl acetate. Wash the mixture with water 5' and brine. Dry, filter and concentrate to afford the title compound (2.00 g, 73%). Use as is. MS (APCI-neg) m/z (rel intensity): 390 (M+H, 100%).

Preparation 167 Synthesis of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxyphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio) picolinonitrile.
Using the method of Preparation 166 using 5-(3-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio) picolinonitrile (1.70 g, 7.02 mmol) and 1-(3-ethyl-2,4-dihydroxyphenyl)ethanone (1.26 g, 7.02 mmol) affords the title compound (2.20 g, 78%). MS (APCI-neg) m/z (rel intensity):
403 (M-H, 100%).
Preparation 168 Synthesis of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio) picolinonitrile.
Using the method of Preparation 166 using 5-(3-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio) picolinonitrile (1.70 g, 7.02 mmol) and 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-propylphenyl)ethanone (1.36 g, 7.02 mmol) affords the title compound (1.25 g, 43%). MS (APCI-neg) rn/z (rel intensity): 417 (M-H, 100%).

Preparation 169 Synthesis of 5-(4-((4-Acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio) picolinonitrile.
Using the method of Preparation 166 using 5-(4-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio) picolinonitrile (1.90 g, 7.84 mmol) and 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-methylphenyl)ethanone (1.30 g, 7.84 mmol) affords the title compound (1.98 g, 65%). MS (APCI-neg) m/z (rel intensity): 389 (M-H, 100%).
Preparation 170 Synthesis of 6-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio) nicotinonitrile.

Using the method of Preparation 166 using 6-(3-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio) nicotinonitrile (1.25 g, 5.15 mmol) and 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-propylphenyl)ethanone (1.00 g, 5.15 mmol) affords the title compound (3.00 g). MS (APCI-neg) m/z (rel intensity):
417 (M-H, 100%).
Preparation 171 Synthesis of 6-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio) nicotinonitrile.
Using the method of Preparation 166 using 6-(3-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio) nicotinonitrile (1.46 g, 6.02 mmol) and 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-methylphenyl)ethanone (1.00 g, 6.02 mmol) affords the title compound (3.00 g). MS (APCI-neg) m/z (rel intensity):
389 (M-H, 100%).
Preparation 172 Synthesis of 2-(3 -((4-acetyl-3 -hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio) isonicotinonitrile.
Using the method of Preparation 166 using 2-(3-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio) isonicotinonitrile (1.46 g, 6.02 mmol) and 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-methylphenyl)ethanone (1.00 g, 6.02 mmol) affords the title compound (1.22 g, 52%). MS (APCI-neg) m/z (rel intensity): 389 (M-H, 100%).
Preparation 173 Synthesis of 2-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio) isonicotinonitrile.
Using the method of Preparation 166 using 2-(3-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio) isonicotinonitrile (1.25 g, 5.15 mmol) and 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-propylphenyl)ethanone (1.00 g, 5.15 inmol) affords the title compound (1.75 g, 81%). MS (APCI-neg) m/z (rel intensity): 417 (M-H, 100%).
Preparation 174 Synthesis of 6-(3 -((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3 -hydroxyphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio) isonicotinonitrile.
Using the method of Preparation 166 using 6-(3-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio) isonicotinonitrile (1.35 g, 5.56 mmol) and 1-(3-ethyl-2,4-dihydroxyphenyl)ethanone (1.00 g, 5.56 mmol) affords the title compound (1.80 g, 80%). MS (APCI-neg) m/z (rel intensity): 403 (M-H, 100%).

Preparation 175 Synthesis of 6-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio) isonicotinonitrile.
Using the method of Preparation 166 using 6-(4-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio) isonicotinonitrile (1.10 g, 4.54 mmol) and 1-(2,4-dihydroxy-3-methylphenyl)ethanone (754 mg, 4.54 mmol) affords the title compound (1.23 g, 69%). MS (APCI-neg) m/z (rel intensity): 389 (M-H, 100%).
Preparation 176 Synthesis of 6-(4-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxyphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio) isonicotinonitrile.
Using the method of Preparation 166 using 6-(4-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio) isonicotinonitrile (1.10 g, 4.54 mmol) and 1-(3-ethyl-2,4-dihydroxyphenyl)ethanone (818 mg, 4.54 mmol) affords the title compound (1.84 g, quant.). MS (APCI-neg) m/z (rel intensity): 403 (M-H, 100%).
Preparation 177 Synthesis of 6-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio) isonicotinonitrile.
Using the method of Preparation 166 using 6-(4-(hydroxymethyl)phenylthio) isonicotinonitrile (1.00 g, 4.13 mmol) and 1-(3-ethyl-2,4-dihydroxyphenyl)ethanone (802 mg, 4.13 mmol) affords the title compound (1.50 g, 87%). MS (APCI-neg) m/z (rel intensity): 417 (M-H, 100%).
Example 71 Synthesis of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)nicotinic acid.

HO O S I~ COOH
~
N
Add LiOH monohydrate (1.29 g, 30.7 mmol) to a solution of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)nicotinonitrile (1.20 g, 3.07 mmol) in a mixture of dioxane (30 mL) and water (15 mL). Heat the mixture at reflux for 2.5 h. Cool to room temperature. Add 17 mL of 2.0 M HCl aq. solution (pH 2-3). Extract with EtOAc. Dry, filter and concentrate. Add EtOAc (30 mL) and CH2C12 (15 mL) to the white solid. Sonicate for 2 min. Filter to afford the title compound (1.25 g, 99%): 'H
NMR (d6-DMSO) 8 1.96 (s, 3 H), 2.58 (s, 3 H), 5.26 (s, 2 H), 6.68 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.42-7.50 (m, 4 H), 7.78 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 8.06 (t, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 8.74 (d, J= 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 8.95 (d, J= 1.6 Hz, 1 H), 12.83 (s, 1 H), 13.62 (s, 1 H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 408 (M-H, 100%).
Example 72 Synthesis of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)nicotinic acid.

O
HO I~ O I~ S COOH
N
Using the method of Example 71 using 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy) methyl)phenylthio)nicotinonitrile (1.29 g, 3.08 mmol) affords the title compound (1.35 g, quant.): 1H NMR (CDC13) S 0.91 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3 H), 1.48-1.58 (m, 2 H), 2.55 (s, 3 H), 2.65 (t, J= 7.6 Hz, 2 H), 5.15 (s, 2 H), 6.42 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.39-7.42 (m, 3 H), 7.46 (s, 1 H), 7.56 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 8.22 (dd, J= 2.0, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 8.71 (d, J= 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 9.10 (d, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 12.73 (s, 1 H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 436 (M-H, 100%).

Example 73 Synthesis of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxyphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)nicotinic acid.
O ~
HO I~ O S I~ COOH
Using the method of Example 71 using 5-(3-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxyphenoxy) methyl)phenylthio)nicotinonitrile (1.02 g, 2.52 mmol) affords the title compound (1.04 g, 97%): 'H NMR (CDC13) 8 1.08 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3 H), 2.56 (s, 3 H), 2.69 (q, J= 7.4 Hz, 2 H), 5.15 (s, 2 H), 6.42 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.39-7.42 (m, 3 H), 7.44 (s, 1 H), 7.56 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 8.21 (dd, J= 2.0, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 8.71 (d, J=
2.3 Hz, 1 H), 9.09 (d, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 12.73 (s, 1 H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 422 (M-H, 100%).
Example 74 Synthesis of 5-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)nicotinic acid.

O
HO IO I~ NI
v S" v COOH

Using the method of Example 71 using 5-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy) methyl)phenylthio)nicotinonitrile (787 mg, 2.02 mmol) affords the title compound (790 mg, 96%): 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) 8 2.05 (s, 3 H), 2.58 (s, 3 H), 5.30 (s, 2 H), 6.72 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.50-7.55 (m, 4 H), 7.81 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 8.02 (dd, J=
2.0, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 8.73 (d, J= 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 8.93 (d, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 12.85 (s, 1 H), 13.61 (s, 1 H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 408 (M-H, 100%).
Example 75 Synthesis of 5-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)nicotinic acid.

O
HOO v ' I~ vl S" v COOH

Using the method of Example 71 using 5-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy) methyl)phenylthio)nicotinonitrile (2.0 g) affords the title compound (134 mg, 6% (over 2 steps)): 1H NMR (CDC13) 6 0.95 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 3 H), 1.53-1.63 (m, 2 H), 2.56 (s, 3 H), 2.70 (t, J= 7.6 Hz, 2 H), 5.17 (s, 2 H), 6.46 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.45 (q, J
= 8.6 Hz, 4 H), 7.58 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 8.22 (dd, J= 2.0, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 8.70 (d, J= 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 9.10 (d, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 12.75 (s, 1 H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 436 (M-H, 100%).

Example 76 Synthesis of 5-(4-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxyphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)nicotinic acid.

o HOI~ O I\ \N
S" v COOH

Using the method of Example 71 using 5-(4-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxyphenoxy) methyl)phenylthio)nicotinonitrile (750 mg, 1.85 mmol) affords the title compound (350 mg, 45%): 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) S 1.04 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3 H), 2.58 (s, H), 2.62 (q, J= 7.4 Hz, 2 H), 5.30 (s, 2 H), 6.72 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.52 (s, 4 H), 7.81 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 8.03 (dd, J= 2.0, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 8.73 (d, J= 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 8.93 (d, J
2.0 Hz, 1 H), 12.84 (s, 1 H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 422 (M-H, 100%).
Example 77 Synthesis of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)picolinic acid.

O
HO I~ O I~ S
N COOH

Using the method of Example 71 using 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)picolinonitrile (2.70 g, 6.92 mmol) affords the title compound (mg, %): 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) 8 1.98 (s, 3H), 2.58 (s, 3H), 5.27 (s, 2H), 6.69 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.41 (m, 1H), 7.48 (m, 3H), 7.73 (m, 1H), 7.80 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.94 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 1H), 8.48 (s, 1H), 12.85 (s, 1H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 408 (M-H, 100%).
Example 78 Synthesis of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxyphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)picolinic acid.
o HO O S I~
~
N" COOH
Using the method of Example 71 using 5-(3-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxy-phenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)picolinonitrile (2.8 g, 6.9 mmol) affords the title compound (2.11 g, 72 %): 'H NMR (d6-DMSO) b 0.96 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 3H), 2.54 (q, J= 7.4 Hz, 2H), 2.57 (s, 3H), 5.29 (s, 2H), 6.68 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.50-7.53 (m, 4H), 7.72 (m, 1H), 7.80 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.95 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 1H), 8.55 (d, J= 2.3 Hz, 1H), 12.83 (s, 1H); MS
(APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 422 (M-H, 100%).
Example 79 Synthesis of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)picolinic acid.

O
gp I~ p I~ S
N COOH

Using the method of Example 71 using 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)picolinonitrile (2.90 g, 6.93 mmol) affords the title compound (1.97 g, 65%): 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) S 0.80 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.46-1.37 (m, 2H), 2.53-2.55 (m, 2H) 2.58 (s, 3H), 5.28 (s, 2H), 6.69 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.44-7.56 (m, 4H), 7.71 (m, 1H), 7.80 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.93 (d, J= 8.6 Hz, 1H), 8.53 (s, 1H), 12.84 (s, 1H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 436 (M-H, 100%).
Example 80 Synthesis of 5-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)picolinic acid.

O
HC I C N COOH
v'S" v Using the method of Example 71 using 5-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)-methyl)phenylthio)picolinonitrile (3.0 g, 7.7 mmol) affords the title compound (2.25 g, 72%): 'H NMR (d6-DMSO) S 2.06 (s, 3H), 2.59 (s, 3H), 5.32 (s, 2H), 6.74 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.56 (s, 4H), 7.70 (m, 1 H), 7.82 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.97 (d, J=
8.2 Hz, 1H), 8.52 (m 1H), 12.85 (s, 1H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 408 (M-H, 100%).
Example 81 Synthesis of 6-(3 -((4-acetyl-3 -hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)nicotinic acid.

O
HO I~ O I~ S IN.
v COOH

Using the method of Example 71 using 6-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)nicotinonitrile (2.16 g, 5.15 mmol) affords the title compound (700 mg, 31%): 'H NMR (d6-DMSO) 6 0.83 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.46 (q, J=
9.9 Hz, 2H), 2.52 (s, 3H), 2.62 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 2H), 5.30 (s, 2H), 6.68 (d, J=
9.0 Hz, 1H), 6.91 (d, J= 8.6 Hz, 1H), 7.57 (s, 3H), 7.61 (m, 1 H), 7.68 (s, 1H), 7.99 (q, J= 6.9 Hz, 1 H), 8.82 (s, 1H), 13.8 (s, 1H).
Example 82 Synthesis of 2-(3 -((4-acetyl-3 -hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)nicotinic acid.

o HO O I~ S IN~
v COOH

Using the method of Example 71 using 2-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy) methyl)phenylthio)nicotinonitrile (2.35 g, 6.02 mmol) affords the title compound (80 mg, 3%): 'H NMR (d6-DMSO) S 2.08 (s, 3H), 2.52 (s, 3H), 5.33 (s, 2H), 6.68 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 6.85 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 1H), 7.58-7.60 (m, 5H), 7.95 (q, J= 7.2 Hz, 1H), 8.79 (d, J= 2.0 Hz, 1H), 12.84 (s, 1H), 13.82 (s, 1H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 408 (M-H, 100%).
Example 83 Synthesis of 6-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinic acid.

O
HO O S N
COOH

Using the method of Exainple 71 using 6-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinonitrile (250 mg, 0.640 mmol) affords the title compound (60.5 mg, 23%): 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) 6 2.13 (s, 3H), 2.56 (s, 3H), 5.18 (s, 2H), 6.47 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.49 (s, 2H), 7.55 (d, J= 5.9 Hz, 2H), 7.5 8(s, 2H), 7.65 (s, 1H), 8.59 (d, J= 5.1 Hz, 1H), 12.76 (s, 1H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity):
408 (M-H, 100%).
Example 84 Synthesis of 6-(3 -((4-acetyl-3 -hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinic acid.

O
s N
O I~ O I~ I
H

COOH
Using the method of Example 71 using 6-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinonitrile (2.16 g, 5.15 mmol) affords the title coinpound (700 mg, 3 1%): 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) 8 0.78 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.43 (m, 2H), 2.51 (s, 3H), 2.56 (t, J= 8.4 Hz, 2H), 5.32 (s, 2H), 6.72 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.35 (s, 1H), 7.57 (m, 4H), 7.70 (s, 1H), 7.81 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 8.59 (d, J= 5.1 Hz, 1H), 12.84 (s, 1H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 436 (M-H, 100%).
Example 85 Synthesis of 6-(3 -((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3 -hydroxyphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinic acid.

O
S N
HO I~ O I~ I ~
COOH

Using the method of Example 71 using 6-(3-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxyphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinonitrile (2.25 g, 5.55 mmol) affords the title compound (750 mg, 32%): 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) 8 0.98 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3H), 2.50 (s, 3H), 2.57 (m, 2H), 5.32 (s, 2H), 6.71 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.36 (s, 1H), 7.56 (m, 4H), 7.69 (s, 1H), 7.80 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 8.59 (d, J= 5.1 Hz, 1H), 12.83 (s, 1H); MS
(APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 422 (M-H, 100%).

Example 86 Synthesis of 6-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinic acid.

O COOH
HO O I -N ~ I
S ~N

Using the method of Example 71 using 6-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-metliylphenoxy) methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinonitrile (1.77 g, 4.54 mmol) affords the title compound (750 mg, 40%): 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) 8 2.08 (s, 3H), 2.59 (s, 3H), 5.36 (s, 2H), 6.75 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.3 5(s, 1 H), 7.54 (m, 111), 7.61 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2H), 7.67 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2H), 7.83 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 8.59 (d, J= 5.1 Hz, 1H), 12.86 (s, 1H); MS
(APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 408 (M-H, 100%).
Example 87 Synthesis of 6-(4-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxyphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinic acid.

O COOH
HO O I ~ ~ I
S N

Using the method of Example 71 using 6-(4-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxyphenoxy) methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinonitrile (1.84 g, 4.54 mmol) affords the title compound (300 mg, 16%): 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) 8 1.07 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3H), 2.50 (s, 3H), 2.65 (q, J= 9.9 Hz, 2H), 5.36 (s, 2H), 6.74 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.35 (s, 1H), 7.55 (d, J= 5.1 Hz, 1H), 7.59 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2H), 7.67 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2H), 7.82 (d, J=
9.0 Hz, 1H), 8.59 (d, J= 5.1 Hz, 1H), 12.85 (s, 1H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity):
422 (M-H, 100%).
Example 88 Synthesis of 6-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinic acid.

O COOH
HO O
.I
S N

Using the method of Example 71 using 6-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxy) methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinonitrile (1.73 g, 4.13 mmol) affords the title compound (350 mg, 19%): 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) 8 0.89 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1'.51 (q, J=
9.9 Hz, 2H), 2.59 (s, 3H), 2.62 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 2H), 5.35 (s, 2H), 6.74 (d, J=
9.4 Hz, 1H), 7.35 (m, 2H), 7.58 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2H), 7.67 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2H), 7.83 (d, J=
9.0 Hz, 1 H), 8.59 (d, J= 5.1 Hz, 1H), 12.86 (s, 1H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 436 (M-H, 100%).
Example 89 Synthesis of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfinyl)nicotinic acid.

HO O S I~ COOH
N

Add a 0.5 M solution of potassium peroxymonosulfate (0.61 g, 1.00 mmol) in water (2.0 mL) to a solution of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-rnethylphenoxy)methyl)-phenylthio)nicotinic acid (205 mg, 0.50 mmol) in methanol (7.5 mL) at 0 C.
Allow the solution to warm to room temperature and stir for 1.5 d. Add water and 2.2 mL
of 2.0 M
HCl to the mixture. Extract the mixture with EtOAc. Dry, filter and concentrate.
Recrystallize the residue from a mixture of CH2C12 and hexanes to give a light yellow solid. Purify the yellow solid by flash chromatograhpy on silica gel eluting with a mixture of acetone, hexanes, and acetic acid (50:50:1 to 90:10) to afford the title compound (31 mg, 15%): 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) S 2.01 (s, 3 H), 2.58 (s, 3 H), 5.33 (s, 2 H), 6.67 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.61-7.63 (m, 2 H), 7.77 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.81-7.83 (m, 1 H), 7.88 (s, 1 H), 8.49 (t, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 9.08 (d, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 9.12 (d, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 12.84 (s, 1 H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 424 (M-H, 100%).

Example 90 Synthesis of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfinyl)nicotinic acid.

O o HO S TCOOH
~ ' N
Using the method of Example 89 using 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2- propyl-phenoxy) methyl)phenylthio)nicotinic acid (219 mg, 0.50 mmol) affords the title compound (90 mg, 40%): 1H NMR (CDC13) 6 0.93 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 3 H), 1.50-1.60 (m, 2 H), 2.56 (s, 3 H), 2.67 (t, J= 7.6 Hz, 2 H), 5.20 (s, 2 H), 6.39 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.55 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.57-7.58 (m, 2 H), 7.69 (dt, J= 1.6, 4.3 Hz, 1 H), 7.76 (s, 1 H), 8.64 (t, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 8.99 (d, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 9.32 (d, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 12.73 (s, 1 H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 452 (M-H, 100%).
Example 91 Synthesis of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxyphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfinyl)nicotinic acid.

O o HO O S nCOOH
N
Using the method of Example 89 using 5-(3-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxy-phenoxy) methyl)phenylthio)nicotinic acid (212 mg, 0.50 mmol) affords the title compound (50 mg, 23%): 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) 6 1.00 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3 H), 2.57 (s, 3 H), 2.57 (q, J= 7.4 Hz, 2 H), 5.33 (s, 2 H), 6.67 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.61-7.63 (m, 2 H), 7.76 (d, J= 9.4 Hz, 1 H), 7.82-7.85 (m, 1 H), 7.87 (s, 1 H), 8.48 (dd, J= 2.0, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 9.08 (d, J= 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 9.11 (d, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 12.83 (s, 1 H), 13.83 (s, 1 H); MS
(APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 438 (M-H, 100%).
Example 92 Synthesis of 5-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfmyl)nicotinic acid.

O
HO O NI
v 'S" v _COOH

Using the method of Example 89 using 5-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methyl-phenoxy) methyl)phenylthio)nicotinic acid (205 mg, 0.50 mmol) affords the title compound (100 mg, 47%): 'H NMR (d6-DMSO) 8 2.04 (s, 3 H), 2.57 (s, 3 H), 5.32 (s, 2 H), 6.69 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.65 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2 H), 7.79 (d, J= 9.4 Hz, 1 H), 7.87 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2 H), 8.50 (dd, J= 2.0, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 9.12 (d, J= 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 9.13 (d, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 12.84 (s, 1 H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 424 (M-H, 100%).
Example 93 Synthesis of 5-(4-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxyphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfinyl)nicotinic acid.

O
HO I O I~ NI
v 'S" v _COOH
O

Using the method of Example 89 using 5-(4-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxyphenoxy) methyl)phenylthio)nicotinic acid (126 mg, 0.30 mmol) affords the title compound (20 mg, 15%): 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) S 1.03 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3 H), 2.56 (s, 3 H), 2.62 (q, J= 7.4 Hz, 2 H), 5.32 (s, 2 H), 6.69 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.64 (d, J=
8.6 Hz, 2 H), 7.79 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.88 (d, J= 8.6 Hz, 2 H), 8.50 (dd, J= 2.0, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 9.12 (d, J= 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 9.13 (d, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 12.83 (s, 1 H), 13.82 (s, 1 H); MS
(APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 438 (M-H, 100%).
Example 94 Synthesis of 6-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfinyl) isonicotinic acid.

O O
HO O S N
COOH

Using the method of Example 89 using 6-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methy-lphenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinic acid (130 mg, 0.317 mmol) affords the title compound (40.2 mg, 30%): 'H NMR (d6-acetone) 8 2.10 (s, 3H), 2.58 (s, 3H), 5.34 (s, 2H), 6.66 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.59-7.64 (m, 2H), 7.75 (d, J= 9.4 Hz, 1H), 7.81 (d, J= 7.4 Hz, 1H), 7.94 (s, 2H), 8.51 (s, 1H), 8.78 (d, J= 5.1 Hz, 1 H), 12.89 (s, 1H);
MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 424 (M-H, 100%).
Example 95 Synthesis of 6-(3 -((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3 -hydroxyphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfinyl) isonicotinic acid.

O o HO O S N~
I~
COOH
Using the method of Example 89 using 6-(3-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxy-phenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinic acid (200 mg, 0.472 mmol) affords the title compound (18 mg, 9%): 'H NMR (d6-DMSO) 6 1.02 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3H), 2.57 (m, 2H), 2.57 (s, 3H), 5.32 (s, 2H), 6.66 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.59 (d, J= 5.1 Hz, 2H), 7.74 (m, 3H), 7.84 (d, J= 5.1 Hz, 1 H), 8.31 (s, 1 H), 8.71 (d, J= 4.7 Hz, 1 H), 12.83 (s, 1 H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 438 (M-H, 100%).
Example 96 Synthesis of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfonyl)-nicotinic acid.

O
HO O ~ COOH
I~ I O S:O

N
Add a 0.5 M solution of potassium peroxymonosulfate (1.54 g, 2.50 mmol) in water (5.0 mL) to a solution of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)-phenylthio)nicotinic acid (205 mg, 0.50 mmol) in methanol (7.5 mL) at room temperature. Heat the reaction mixture at 40 C for 3 d. Add a 0.5 M solution of potassium peroxymonosulfate (1.54 g, 2.50 mmol) in water (5.0 mL) and DMF (10 mL) to the mixture. Heat the mixture at 80 C for 19 h. Cool to room temp. Add water and 0.50 mL of 2.0 M HCl to the mixture. Extract the mixture with EtOAc. Dry, filter and concentrate. Purify the residue by flash chromatograhpy on silica gel eluting with a mixture of acetone, CH2C12, and acetic acid (20:80:1) to afford the title compound (74 mg, 34%): 'H NMR (d6-DMSO) 6 2.03 (s, 3 H), 2.58 (s, 3 H), 5.37 (s, 2 H), 6.70 (d, J=
9.4 Hz, 1 H), 7.71 (t, J= 7.8 Hz, 1 H), 7.79 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.82 (d, J=
7.8 Hz, 1 H), 8.07 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 1 H), 8.16 (s, 1 H), 8.63 (dd, J= 2.0, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 9.28 (d, J=
2.0 Hz, 1 H), 9.35 (d, J= 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 12.84 (s, 1 H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 440 (M-H, 100%).
Example 97 Synthesis of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfonyl) nicotinic acid.

O
HO I~ O C" S'C COOH
N

Using the method of Example 96 using 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2- propyl-phenoxy) methyl)phenylthio)nicotinic acid (219 mg, 0.50 mmol) affords the title compound (135 mg, 58%): 1H NMR (CDC13) 8 0.95 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 3 H), 1.52-1.62 (m, 2 H), 2.57 (s, 3 H), 2.69 (t, J= 7.6 Hz, 2 H), 5.22 (s, 2 H), 6.41 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.57 (d, J= 8.6 Hz, 1 H), 7.63 (t, J= 7.8 Hz, 1 H), 7.70 (d, J= 7.4 Hz, 1 H), 7.99 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 1 H), 8.05 (s, 1 H), 8.83 (dd, J= 2.0, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 9.32 (d, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 9.42 (d, J=
2.0 Hz, 1 H), 12.74 (s, 1 H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 468 (M-H, 100%).
Example 98 Synthesis of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxyphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfonyl)nicotinic acid.

o HO O I ~ S'O nF COOH
N
Using the method of Example 96 using 5-(3-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxy-phenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)nicotinic acid (212 mg, 0.50 mmol) affords the title compound (130 mg, 57%): 'H NMR (d6-DMSO) 5 1.03 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3 H), 2.57 (s, 3 H), 2.60 (q, J= 7.4 Hz, 2 H), 5.3 8 (s, 2 H), 6.69 (d, J= 9.4 Hz, 1 H), 7.72 (t, J= 7.8 Hz, 1 H), 7.79 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.81 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 1 H), 8.08 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 1 H), 8.15 (s, 1 H), 8.62 (dd, J= 2.0, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 9.28 (d, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 9.33 (d, J=
2.3 Hz, 1 H), 12.84 (s, 1 H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 454 (M-H, 100%).
Example 99 Synthesis of 5-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfonyl) nicotinic acid.

O
HOI~O %N
I
" v _COOH
O O

Using the method of Example 96 using 5-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methyl-phenoxy) methyl)phenylthio)nicotinic acid (205 mg, 0.50 mmol) affords the title compound (145 mg, 66%): 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) 8 2.06 (s, 3 H), 2.57 (s, 3 H), 5.38 (s, 2 H), 6.68 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.72 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2 H), 7.79 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 8.14 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2 H), 8.63 (t, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 9.28 (d, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 9.38 (d, J= 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 12.84 (s, 1 H), 14.01 (s, 1 H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity):
440 (M-H, 100%).
Example 100 Synthesis of 5-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfonyl) nicotinic acid.

O
HOI~ O I~ NI
,S" v _COOH
O O

Using the method of Example 96 using 5-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)nicotinic acid (75 mg, 0.17 mmol) affords the title compound (46 mg, 57%): 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) 8 0.88 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3 H), 1.44-1.54 (m, 2 H), 2.56 (s, 3 H), 2.61 (t, J= 7.6 Hz, 2 H), 5.3 8 (s, 2 H), 6.67 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.70 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2 H), 7.79 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 8.16 (d, J= 8.6 Hz, 2 H), 8.64 (t, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 9.28 (d, J= 1.7 Hz, 1 H), 9.38 (d, J= 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 12.84 (s, 1 H), 14.02 (s, 1 H); MS
(APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 468 (M-H, 100%).

Example 101 Synthesis of 5-(4-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxyphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfonyl)nicotinic acid.

o HO O NI
" v _COOH
O O

Using the method of Example 96 using 5-(4-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxy-plienoxy) methyl)phenylthio)nicotinic acid (140 mg, 0.33 mmol) affords the title compound (72 mg, 48%): 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) 8 1.05 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3 H), 2.56 (s, 3 H), 2.63 (q, J= 7.4 Hz, 2 H), 5.3 9 (s, 2 H), 6.67 (d, J= 9.4 Hz, 1 H), 7.71 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2 H), 7.79 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 8.15 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 2 H), 8.64 (dd, J= 2.0, 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 9.28 (d, J= 2.0 Hz, 1 H), 9.3 8(d, J= 2.3 Hz, 1 H), 12.84 (s, 1 H), 14.01 (s, 1 H); MS
(APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 454 (M-H, 100%).
Example 102 Synthesis of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfonyl) picolinic acid.

O
O: :O
HO
O I~ nN~ ~ COOH

Using the method of Example 96 using 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methyl-phenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)picolinic acid (250 mg, 0.61 mmol) affords the title compound (57 mg, 21%): 'H NMR (d6-DMSO) S 2.04 (s, 3H), 2.58 (s, 3H), 5.38 (s, 2H), 6.70 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.72 (t, J= 7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.82 (q, J= 13.5 Hz, 2H), 8.04 (d, J=
8.2 Hz, 1H), 8.15 (s, 1H), 8.21 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 1H), 8.51 (m, 1H), 9.24 (s, 1H), 12.85 (s, 1H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 440 (M-H, 100%).
Example 103 Synthesis of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxyphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfonyl)picolinic acid.

o O: :O
HO O S
14, N COOH

Using the method of Example 96 using 5-(3-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxy-phenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)picolinic acid (250 mg, 0.59 mmol) affords the title compound (160 mg, 59%): 'H NMR (d6-DMSO) S 1.03 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3H), 2.57 (s, 3H), 2.60 (q, J= 10.2 Hz, 2H), 5.38 (s, 2H), 6.69 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.83-7.70 (m, 3H), 8.04 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 1H), 8.13 (s, 1H), 8.20 (d, J= 8.2 Hz, 1H), 8.50 (m, 1H), 9.21 (d, J= 2.3 Hz, 1H), 12.84 (s, 1H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 454 (M-H, 100%).
Example 104 Synthesis of 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfonyl) picolinic acid.

O
O ,O
HO O S
N COOH

Using the method of Example 96 using 5-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxy)inethyl)phenylthio)picolinic acid (250 mg, 0.57 mmol) affords the title compound (170 mg, 63%): 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) 8 0.86 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.47 (m, 2H), 2.58 (s, 3H), 2.58 (t, J= 11.9 Hz, 2H), 5.37 (s, 2H), 6.70 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.72 (t, J=
7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.80 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 2H), 8.04 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 1H), 8.13 (s, 1 H), 8.20 (m, 1H), 8.50 (q, J= 7.0 Hz, 1H), 9.21 (m, 1H), 12.85 (s, 2H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 468 (M-H, 100%).

Example 105 Synthesis of 6-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfonyl) isonicotinic acid.

O
N
O:S;O
HO oI ~ I ~
~
COOH

Using the method of Example 96 using 6-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methyl-phenoxy) methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinic acid (100 mg, 0.244 mmol) affords the title compound (23.0 mg, 24%): 'H NMR (d6-DMSO) 8 2.03 (s, 3H), 2.58 (s, 3H), 5.38 (s, 2H), 6.69 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.70 (t, J= 7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.80 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.83 (d, J
= 7.8 Hz, 1H), 7.98 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 1H), 8.07 (s, 1H), 8.08 (s, 1H), 8.49 (s, 1H), 8.89 (d, J
= 4.7 Hz, 1H), 12.85 (s, 1H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 440 (M-H, 100%).
Example 106 Synthesis of 6-(3 -((4-acetyl-3 -hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfonyl) isonicotinic acid.

O
~ .
HO O OSON
I~ I~
COOH
Using the method of Example 96 using 6-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy) methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinic acid (200 mg, 0.457 mmol) affords the title compound (87 mg, 41%): 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) 6 0.86 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3H), 1.51-1.42 (2, 111), 2.58 (m, 2H), 2.58 (s; 3H), 5.37 (s, 1H), 6.69 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.71 (t, J= 7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.80 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 2H), 7.99 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 1H), 8.07 (s, 1H), 8.08 (s, 1H), 8.49 (s, 1H), 8.88 (d, J= 4.7 Hz, 1H), 12.84 (s, 1H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 469 ?? (M-H, 100%).
Example 107 Synthesis of 6-(3-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxyphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfonyl) isonicotinic acid.

O
HO O O~ S"O N
~ \ ~ \
i COOH
Using the method of Example 96 using 6-(3-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxy-phenoxy) methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinic acid (200 mg, 0.472 mmol) affords the title compound (125 mg, 58%): 'H NMR (d6-DMSO) S 1.02 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 3H), 2.57 (s, 3H), 2.60 (q, J= 7.4 Hz, 2H), 5.38 (s, 2H), 6.68 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.71 (t, J=
7.6 Hz, 1H), 7.80 (m, 2H), 7.99 (d, J= 7.8 Hz, 1H), 8.07 (d, J= 6.2 Hz, 2H), 8.49 (s, 1H), 8.88 (d, J=
4.7 Hz, 1H), 12.83 (s, 1H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 454 (M-H, 100%).

Example 108 Synthesis of 6-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfonyl) isonicotinic acid.

O COOH
HO O 0 ~ I
.
O,S,,O N

Using the method of Example 96 using 6-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-methylphenoxy) methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinic acid (200 mg, 0.488 mmol) affords the title compound (163 mg, 76 %): 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) 6 2.07 (s, 3H), 2.57 (s, 3H), 5.39 (s, 2H), 6.69 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.66 (d, J= 8.5 Hz, 2H), 7.80 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 114), 8.05 (d, J= 8.6 Hz, 2H), 8.09 (m, 1H), 8.49 (s, 1H), 8.90 (d, J= 4.7 Hz, 1H), 12.84 (s, 1H);
MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 440 (M-H, 100%).
Example 109 Synthesis of 6-(4-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxyphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfonyl) isonicotinic acid.

O COOH
HO O I ~ ~ I
0,,~,o N

Using the method of Example 96 using 6-(4-((4-acetyl-2-ethyl-3-hydroxy-phenoxy) methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinic acid (150 mg, 0.354 mmol) affords the title compound (20 mg, 12%): 1H NMR (d6-DMSO) 8 1.05 (t, J= 7.6 Hz, 3H), 2.57 (s, 3H), 2.64 (q, J= 9.8 Hz, 2H), 5.39 (s, 2H), 6.68 (d, J= 9.4 Hz, 1 H), 7.70 (s, 1 H), 7.72 (s, 1 H), 7.80 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 2H), 8.04 (m, 3H), 8.86 (d, J= 4.7 Hz, 1H), 12.84 (s, 1H);
MS
(APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 454 (M-H, 100%).
Example 110 Synthesis of 6-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl)phenylsulfonyl) isonicotinic acid.

O I COOH
HO O I ~ ~ I
0A, 0 N

Using the method of Example 96 using 6-(4-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinic acid (100 mg, 0.229 mmol) affords the title compound (2 mg, 2%): 'H NMR (d6-DMSO) S 0.88 (t, J= 7.2 Hz, 3H), 1.49 (m, 2H), 2.57 (s, 3H), 2.61 (t, J= 7.4 Hz, 2H), 5.3 8(s, 2H), 6.68 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1 H), 7.69 (d, J=
8.6 Hz, 211), 7.80 (d, J= 9.0 Hz, 1H), 7.99 (d, J= 4.7 Hz, 1H), 8.03 (d, J=
8.2 Hz, 2H), 8.46 (s, 1 H), 8.78 (d, J= 4.7 Hz, 1H), 12.84 (s, 1 H); MS (APCI-neg mode) m/z (rel intensity): 468 (M-H, 100%).

Claims (24)

1. A compound of formula I

wherein R1 is selected from the group consisting of C1-C5 alkyl, C3-C7 cycloalkyl, C4-cycloalkylalkyl, phenyl and substituted phenyl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C1-C5 alkyl, substituted C1-C5 alkyl, halo, phenyl, substituted phenyl, C1-C3 fluoroalkyl, CN, CO2R3, thiophenyl, substituted thiophenyl, thiazolyl, substituted thiazoyl, furanyl, substituted furanyl, pyridinyl, substituted pyridinyl, oxazolyl, substituted oxazloyl, isothiazolyl, substituted isothiazoyl, isoxazolyl, substituted isoxazolyl,1,2,4-oxadiazolyl, substituted 1,2,4-oxadiazolyl, pyrimidinyl, substituted pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, and substituted pyridazinyl;
X is selected from the group consisting of O, S(O)m, and NR3;
Y is selected from the group consisting of C1-C3 alkanediyl and substituted C1-C3 alkanediyl;
Ar1 and Ar2 are independently selected from the group consisting of phenylene, substituted phenylene, thiophenediyl, substituted thiophenediyl, thiazolediyl, substituted thiazolediyl, furanediyl, substituted furanediyl, pyridinediyl, substituted pyridinediyl, oxazolediyl, substituted oxazolediyl, isothiazolediyl, substituted isothiazolediyl, isoxazolediyl, substituted isoxazolediyl, pyrimidinediyl, substituted pyrimidinediyl, pyridazinediyl, substituted pyridazinediyl and 1,2,4-oxadiazole-3,5-diyl;
L is selected from the group consisting of -G-O-J-, -G-S(O)p-J-, and -G-N(R4)-J-;
G is a bond;
J is independently selected from the group consisting of a bond and C1C3 alkanediyl;

R3 is independently hydrogen or C1-C5 alkyl;
R4 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, C1-C5 alkyl, C(=O)R3, C(=O)NR3R3 and SO2R3;
Z is selected from the group consisting of (CH2)n COOH, m and p are independently 0, 1, or 2;
n and q are independently 0, 1, 2 or 3; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
2. A compound according to Claim 1 wherein X is O.
3. A compound according to Claim 1 or 2 wherein Y is C1-C3 alkanediyl.
4. A compound according to Claim 1, 2 or 3 wherein Ar1 and Ar2 are independently phenylene or pyridinediyl.
5. A compound according to Claim 1, 2, 3 or 4 wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of C1-C5 alkyl, halo and C1-C3 fluoroalkyl.
6. A compound according to Claim 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 wherein L is O.
7. A compound according to Claim 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 wherein L is S.
8. A compound according to Claim 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7 wherein Z is selected from the group consisting of (CH2)n COOH and and n and q are 0.
9. A compound according to Claim 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8 wherein Ar1 is phenylene.
10. A compound according to Claim 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9 wherein Ar2 is pyridinediyl.
11. A compound according to Claim 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 wherein Ar2 is attached at the 1-4 position.
12. A compound according to Claim 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10 wherein Ar2 is attached at the 1-3 position.
13. A compound according to Claim 11 or Claim 12 wherein Ar1 is attached at the 1-3 position or 1-4 position.
14. A compound according to any one of Claims 1-13 wherein R1 is methyl.
15. A compound according to any one of Claims 1, 6, 7 and 9-14 wherein R1 is methyl or ethyl;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, fluoro, chloro, trifluoromethyl, and COOH;
X is O;
Y is methylene;
Ar1 is phenylene or pyridinediyl;
Ar2 is selected from the group consisting of phenylene, trifluoromethylphenylene, and pyridinediyl;
L is selected from the group consisting of O, S, SO, SO2 and NH; and Z is COOH or
16. A compound according to Claim 1 selected from the group consisting of 1-(2-hydroxy-3-methyl-4-{4-[4-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-pyridin-2-yloxy]-benzyloxy}-phenyl)-ethanone, 1-(2-hydroxy-3-methyl-4-{4-[3-(1H-tetrazol-5-yl)-phenoxy]-benzyloxy}-phenyl)-ethanone and 1-(2-hydroxy-4-{3-[4-(2H-tetrazol-5-yl)-pyridin-2-yloxy]-benzyloxy}-3-trifluoromethyl-phenyl)-ethanone.
17. A compound according to Claim 1 which is 6-(3-((4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propyl-phenoxy)methyl)phenylthio)isonicotinic acid.
18. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound of any one of Claims 1-and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier, diluent or excipient.
19. A method of treating migraine, comprising administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount of a compound of any one of Claims 1-17.
20. A compound according to any one of Claims 1-17 for use as a medicament.
21. The use of a compound of any one of Claims 1-17 for the manufacture of a medicament for treating migraine.
22. A process for preparing the compound of formula I, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R1, R2, X, Y, Ar1, L and Ar2 are defined as in Claim 1 comprising the step selected from (A) for a compound of formula I where Z is tetrazolyl, cycloaddition of a compound of formula II where R10 is cyano with an azide reagent;

(B) for a compound of formula I where Z is COOH, hydrolysis of a compound of formula II wherein R10 is COOR14 and R14 is selected from the group consisting of C1-C5 alkyl, phenyl and benzyl;

(C) for a compound of formula I where Z is COOH, hydrolysis of a compound of formula II where R10 is cyano; and whereafter, when a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of the compound of formula I
is required, it is obtained by reacting the acid of formula I with a physiologically acceptable base or by reacting a basic compound of formula I with a physiologically acceptable acid or by any other conventional procedure.
23. A compound of formula II

wherein R1, R2, X, Y, Ar1, Ar2 and L are defined as in Claim 1;
and R10 is CN or COOR14 in which R14 is selected from the group consisting of Cl-alkyl, phenyl and benzyl;
other than 5-[[6-[(4-acetyl-3-hydroxy-2-propylphenoxy)methyl]-2-pyridinyl]-methoxy]-2-butoxybenzoic acid ethyl ester.
24. A compound according to Claim 23 wherein R14 is methyl.
CA2588881A 2004-11-22 2005-11-15 Potentiators of glutamate receptors Expired - Fee Related CA2588881C (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US63006004P 2004-11-22 2004-11-22
US60/630,060 2004-11-22
PCT/US2005/041367 WO2006057860A1 (en) 2004-11-22 2005-11-15 Potentiators of glutamate receptors

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
CA2588881A1 true CA2588881A1 (en) 2006-06-01
CA2588881C CA2588881C (en) 2013-04-09

Family

ID=35929650

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CA2590349A Expired - Fee Related CA2590349C (en) 2004-11-22 2005-11-15 Potentiators of glutamate receptors
CA2588881A Expired - Fee Related CA2588881C (en) 2004-11-22 2005-11-15 Potentiators of glutamate receptors

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CA2590349A Expired - Fee Related CA2590349C (en) 2004-11-22 2005-11-15 Potentiators of glutamate receptors

Country Status (29)

Country Link
US (5) US7598423B2 (en)
EP (4) EP2441762A1 (en)
JP (2) JP5175551B2 (en)
KR (3) KR20090006237A (en)
CN (3) CN101955470B (en)
AT (3) ATE461188T1 (en)
AU (2) AU2005309865B2 (en)
BR (2) BRPI0518360A2 (en)
CA (2) CA2590349C (en)
CY (2) CY1109998T1 (en)
DE (2) DE602005020056D1 (en)
DK (2) DK1817300T3 (en)
EA (2) EA200701122A1 (en)
ES (3) ES2333979T3 (en)
HK (1) HK1109140A1 (en)
HR (1) HRP20120137T1 (en)
IL (2) IL182957A (en)
MA (2) MA29135B1 (en)
MX (2) MX2007006145A (en)
NO (2) NO20072971L (en)
NZ (1) NZ554399A (en)
PL (2) PL1817300T3 (en)
PT (2) PT1817301E (en)
RS (1) RS52268B (en)
SI (2) SI1817301T1 (en)
TN (2) TNSN07195A1 (en)
UA (1) UA90695C2 (en)
WO (3) WO2006057869A1 (en)
ZA (2) ZA200703579B (en)

Families Citing this family (35)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2006057869A1 (en) 2004-11-22 2006-06-01 Eli Lilly And Company Potentiators of glutamate receptors
KR100789242B1 (en) 2005-07-08 2008-01-02 주식회사 엘지화학 Transition metal complexes, catalysts composition containing the same and olefin polymerization theirwith
AR059898A1 (en) 2006-03-15 2008-05-07 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv DERIVATIVES OF 3-CIANO-PIRIDONA 1,4-DISUSTITUTED AND ITS USE AS ALLOSTERIC MODULATORS OF MGLUR2 RECEIVERS
TW200845978A (en) 2007-03-07 2008-12-01 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv 3-cyano-4-(4-tetrahydropyran-phenyl)-pyridin-2-one derivatives
TW200900065A (en) 2007-03-07 2009-01-01 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv 3-cyano-4-(4-pyridinyloxy-phenyl)-pyridin-2-one derivatives
CA2686651C (en) 2007-05-25 2015-11-24 Abbott Gmbh & Co. Kg Heterocyclic compounds as positive modulators of metabotropic glutamate receptor 2 (mglu2 receptor)
NZ584145A (en) 2007-09-14 2012-03-30 Ortho Mcneil Janssen Pharm 1',3'-disubstituted-4-phenyl-3,4,5,6-tetrahydro-2h, 1'h-[1,4'] bipyridinyl-2'-ones
EP2205565B1 (en) 2007-09-14 2013-04-17 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 1,3-disubstituted-4-phenyl-1 h-pyridin-2-ones
TW201006801A (en) * 2008-07-18 2010-02-16 Lilly Co Eli Imidazole carboxamides
ES2439291T3 (en) 2008-09-02 2014-01-22 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 3-Azabicyclo [3.1.0] hexyl derivatives as modulators of metabotropic glutamate receptors
US8697689B2 (en) 2008-10-16 2014-04-15 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Indole and benzomorpholine derivatives as modulators of metabotropic glutamate receptors
MX2011005242A (en) 2008-11-28 2011-09-06 Ortho Mcneil Janssen Pharm Indole and benzoxazine derivatives as modulators of metabotropic glutamate receptors.
MY153913A (en) 2009-05-12 2015-04-15 Janssen Pharmaceuticals Inc 7-aryl-1,2,4-triazolo[4,3-a]pyridine derivatives and their use as positive allosteric modulators of mglur2 receptors
MY161325A (en) 2009-05-12 2017-04-14 Janssen Pharmaceuticals Inc 1, 2, 4-triazolo[4,3-a]pyridine derivatives and their use for the treatment or prevention of neurological and psychiatric disorders
CA2760259C (en) 2009-05-12 2018-05-01 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 1,2,4-triazolo[4,3-a]pyridine derivatives and their use as positive allosteric modulators of mglur2 receptors
US8748632B2 (en) 2010-03-19 2014-06-10 Sanford-Burnham Medical Research Institute Positive allosteric modulators of group II mGluRs
US8314120B2 (en) 2010-03-30 2012-11-20 Abbott Gmbh & Co. Kg Small molecule potentiators of metabotropic glutamate receptors
US8664214B2 (en) 2010-03-30 2014-03-04 AbbVie Deutschland GmbH & Co. KG Small molecule potentiators of metabotropic glutamate receptors I
CN103298809B (en) 2010-11-08 2016-08-31 杨森制药公司 1,2,4-triazol [4,3-a] pyridine derivate and the purposes of the positive allosteric modulators as MGLUR2 acceptor thereof
JP5852664B2 (en) 2010-11-08 2016-02-03 ジヤンセン・フアーマシユーチカルズ・インコーポレーテツド 1,2,4-Triazolo [4,3-a] pyridine derivatives and their use as positive allosteric modulators of the mGluR2 receptor
ES2536433T3 (en) 2010-11-08 2015-05-25 Janssen Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 1,2,4-Triazolo [4,3-a] pyridine derivatives and their use as positive allosteric modulators of mGluR2 receptors
US9000044B2 (en) 2012-02-28 2015-04-07 Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Substituted naphthylacetic acids
CN102977040B (en) * 2012-11-20 2015-06-03 浙江工业大学 Method for synthesizing 2-quinoxalinyl dimethylacetal and 2-quinoxalinyl formaldehyde
EP2746260A1 (en) 2012-12-21 2014-06-25 Basf Se Substituted [1,2,4]triazole and imidazole compounds
EP2746259A1 (en) 2012-12-21 2014-06-25 Basf Se Substituted [1,2,4]triazole and imidazole compounds
JO3368B1 (en) 2013-06-04 2019-03-13 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv 6,7-DIHYDROPYRAZOLO[1,5-a]PYRAZIN-4(5H)-ONE COMPOUNDS AND THEIR USE AS NEGATIVE ALLOSTERIC MODULATORS OF MGLUR2 RECEPTORS
JO3367B1 (en) 2013-09-06 2019-03-13 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv 1,2,4-TRIAZOLO[4,3-a]PYRIDINE COMPOUNDS AND THEIR USE AS POSITIVE ALLOSTERIC MODULATORS OF MGLUR2 RECEPTORS
WO2015110435A1 (en) 2014-01-21 2015-07-30 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Combinations comprising positive allosteric modulators or orthosteric agonists of metabotropic glutamatergic receptor subtype 2 and their use
ME03518B (en) 2014-01-21 2020-04-20 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv Combinations comprising positive allosteric modulators or orthosteric agonists of metabotropic glutamatergic receptor subtype 2 and their use
US10099993B2 (en) * 2014-04-06 2018-10-16 Sanford-Burnham Medical Research Institute Metabotropic glutamate receptor positive allosteric modulators (PAMS) and uses thereof
CN104959070A (en) * 2015-06-19 2015-10-07 武汉工程大学 Cationic gemini surfactant and preparing method thereof
WO2018140858A1 (en) * 2017-01-30 2018-08-02 Western New England University Thiol isomerases inhibitors and use thereof
CN110467544A (en) * 2019-08-19 2019-11-19 武汉轻工大学 A kind of preparation method of gram of vertical boron sieve intermediate
NZ788464A (en) * 2019-12-11 2024-07-05 Taro Pharmaceutical Ind Ltd Preparation of trifarotene and intermediates and polymorphs thereof
CN114702408B (en) * 2022-02-22 2024-01-16 南京康川济医药科技有限公司 Preparation method and application of clenbuterol impurity

Family Cites Families (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
GB2058785B (en) 1979-09-05 1983-05-25 Glaxo Group Ltd Phenol derivatives
ATE7897T1 (en) 1979-09-05 1984-06-15 Glaxo Group Limited PHENOL DERIVATIVES, PROCESS FOR THEIR MANUFACTURE AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THEM.
US4666928A (en) 1984-08-30 1987-05-19 Merck Frosst Canada, Ind. Propylphenoxy pyridine carboxylates as leukotriene antagonists
JPS61130271A (en) 1984-11-30 1986-06-18 Tokyo Tanabe Co Ltd Aromatic carboxylic acid derivative and its salt
US4853398A (en) 1987-04-13 1989-08-01 Eli Lilly And Company Leukotriene antagonists and use thereas
JPH0768224B2 (en) * 1987-04-20 1995-07-26 杏林製薬株式会社 Benzimidazole derivative and method for producing the same
EP0516069B1 (en) * 1991-05-31 1996-04-24 Sumitomo Pharmaceuticals Company, Limited Leukotriene B4 antagonist
HU226462B1 (en) 1995-02-17 2008-12-29 Hoechst Ag Substituted benzol-sulfonyl-ureas and -thioureas, process for producing them, pharmaceutical compositions containing them, and their use
US6194432B1 (en) 1998-10-13 2001-02-27 Fred D. Sheftell Prevention and treatment of migraine, cluster and other recurrent headaches using leukotriene antagonist drugs
ATE286051T1 (en) * 1999-12-31 2005-01-15 Encysive Pharmaceuticals Inc SULFONAMIDES AND THEIR DERIVATIVES THAT MODULATE THE ACTIVITY OF ENDOTHELIN
AU2001234420A1 (en) 2000-02-03 2001-08-14 Eli Lilly And Company Potentiators of glutamate receptors
JP2006502143A (en) * 2002-08-26 2006-01-19 メルク　エンド　カムパニー　インコーポレーテッド An acetophenone potentiator of metabotropic glutamate receptors
FR2871713B1 (en) 2004-06-21 2006-08-25 Renault Sas AUTOMOTIVE PAINT APPLICATION INSTALLATION AND METHOD USING THE INSTALLATION
JP2008508306A (en) 2004-07-30 2008-03-21 メルク エンド カムパニー インコーポレーテッド Indanone enhancer of metabotropic glutamate receptor
CA2574956A1 (en) * 2004-07-30 2006-02-09 Merck & Co., Inc. Heterocyclic acetophenone potentiators of metabotropic glutamate receptors
CA2585210A1 (en) 2004-10-28 2006-05-11 Merck & Co., Inc. Pyrimidine and quinoline potentiators of metabotropic glutamate receptors
WO2006057869A1 (en) 2004-11-22 2006-06-01 Eli Lilly And Company Potentiators of glutamate receptors

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
HRP20120137T1 (en) 2012-03-31
CN101061105B (en) 2012-05-30
US20090318481A1 (en) 2009-12-24
US20080004321A1 (en) 2008-01-03
ATE461188T1 (en) 2010-04-15
ES2340600T3 (en) 2010-06-07
IL182959A0 (en) 2007-08-19
ES2333979T3 (en) 2010-03-03
US7816523B2 (en) 2010-10-19
IL182957A0 (en) 2007-08-19
AU2005309865A1 (en) 2006-06-01
KR100895167B1 (en) 2009-05-04
IL182957A (en) 2012-08-30
DK1817300T3 (en) 2010-05-17
KR20090006237A (en) 2009-01-14
EP1817301A1 (en) 2007-08-15
NZ554399A (en) 2010-10-29
SI1817300T1 (en) 2010-07-30
PT1817301E (en) 2012-04-03
PL1817301T3 (en) 2012-08-31
CN101955470A (en) 2011-01-26
MA29135B1 (en) 2008-01-02
MA29136B1 (en) 2008-01-02
CY1109998T1 (en) 2014-09-10
CN101061106A (en) 2007-10-24
JP2008520680A (en) 2008-06-19
AU2005309855A1 (en) 2006-06-01
UA90695C2 (en) 2010-05-25
NO20072971L (en) 2007-06-27
US7598423B2 (en) 2009-10-06
US20080139505A1 (en) 2008-06-12
EP1817301B1 (en) 2012-02-01
PL1817300T3 (en) 2010-08-31
DE602005020056D1 (en) 2010-04-29
EP1817300B1 (en) 2010-03-17
EP1817296A1 (en) 2007-08-15
CA2590349C (en) 2013-05-07
EA200701122A1 (en) 2007-12-28
KR20070064375A (en) 2007-06-20
SI1817301T1 (en) 2012-04-30
EP1817300A1 (en) 2007-08-15
CN101061105A (en) 2007-10-24
ES2378673T3 (en) 2012-04-16
MX2007006145A (en) 2007-10-23
WO2006057860A1 (en) 2006-06-01
ZA200703579B (en) 2009-04-29
ZA200704001B (en) 2008-10-29
TNSN07196A1 (en) 2008-11-21
CA2588881C (en) 2013-04-09
AU2005309865B2 (en) 2011-07-28
US20090318483A1 (en) 2009-12-24
MX2007006146A (en) 2007-08-07
EA200701121A1 (en) 2007-12-28
NO20072965L (en) 2007-06-28
EA011867B1 (en) 2009-06-30
DK1817301T3 (en) 2012-02-27
KR20070085412A (en) 2007-08-27
WO2006057870A1 (en) 2006-06-01
CN101955470B (en) 2012-06-13
ATE447562T1 (en) 2009-11-15
CY1112402T1 (en) 2015-12-09
JP5184089B2 (en) 2013-04-17
WO2006057869A1 (en) 2006-06-01
EP2441762A1 (en) 2012-04-18
DE602005017510D1 (en) 2009-12-17
HK1109140A1 (en) 2008-05-30
TNSN07195A1 (en) 2008-11-21
US7803938B2 (en) 2010-09-28
JP5175551B2 (en) 2013-04-03
US20080096930A1 (en) 2008-04-24
US7858646B2 (en) 2010-12-28
JP2008520676A (en) 2008-06-19
EP1817296B1 (en) 2009-11-04
PT1817300E (en) 2010-05-28
RS52268B (en) 2012-10-31
US7678794B2 (en) 2010-03-16
CA2590349A1 (en) 2006-06-01
AU2005309855B2 (en) 2011-10-06
BRPI0518360A2 (en) 2008-11-18
BRPI0518459A2 (en) 2008-11-18
CN101061106B (en) 2010-09-29
ATE543807T1 (en) 2012-02-15

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CA2588881C (en) Potentiators of glutamate receptors
KR20190122678A (en) Novel isoindolin derivatives, pharmaceutical compositions and uses thereof
JP2008508288A (en) Heterocyclic acetophenone potentiators of metabotropic glutamate receptors
JPH07116150B2 (en) Benzoic acid derivative
AU2011226942B2 (en) Potentiators of glutamate receptors

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
EEER Examination request
MKLA Lapsed

Effective date: 20171115